Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 1

Dear Client,Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 147 has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 147.
The Warranty Booklet also containes the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo, you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organisation is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Enjoy the reading and have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 147, so you should only consider the information concerning
the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

Alfawiki.nl

1

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 2

VERY IMPORTANT!
FUEL CAPACITYK

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or
mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due to the damage caused.
NOTE The use of Eurodiesel fuel is recommended only for markets/ versions where required. In case it is not available, use
fuel conforming to EN590 European Specification.

STARTING THE ENGINE
Petrol engines with mechanical transmission: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift leverto neutral, fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon
as the engine has started.
Petrol engine with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition key to
AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows
position N).
JTD engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral, fully depress the clutch withoutpressing the accelerator, then turn the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral, fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the ¢ and mwarning lights to go off; turnthe ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
2

While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine needles or
any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

Alfawiki.nl

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 3

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment.

ACCESSORY ELECTRICAL DEVICES쇵

If after purchasing the car you wish to install accessories that need an electrical supply (with the risk of gradually draining
the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will assess the overall electrical absorption and check whether the
car system is able to withstand the load required.

CODE CARD (for versions/markets where applicable)
Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. It is advisable to always keep the electronic code on the CODE card with you in caseemergency starting is necessary.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance makes it possible to preserve car performance levels and safety, respect for the environment and low
running costs unaltered over the course of time.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK…
…you will find important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and car maintenance over time.
Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (protecting the environment) â (car safety).

Alfawiki.nl

3001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 4

Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the car was purchased, the subsidiary company or to ourbranch offices or any point of the Alfa Romeo Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new car and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services
and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your car. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guideThis contains Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The Services can be recognised by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organisation in Italy can be found in the telephone directory under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all of the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the car. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

Alfawiki.nl

4001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 5

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects
which should, in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETY

Warning. Partially or fully ignoringthese rules may lead to serious injury.

PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENTThis indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to prevent the carfrom damaging the environment.

CAR SAFETY

Warning. Partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage beingcaused to the car which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the car
at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production,
therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

Alfawiki.nl

5

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 6

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS

THE ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM

Special coloured labels have been attachednear to or actually on some of the components making up your Alfa 147. Theselabels bear symbols that remind you of the
precautions to be taken as regards that particular component. A summary list of thesymbols (fig.1) is to be found under thebonnet.
A0A1000m

KEYS

To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the key isremoved from the ignition. In fact the gripof each key contains an electronic device
which modulates the radio frequency signaltransmitted when the engine is started by aspecial aerial incorporated in the ignition
switch. This modulated signal is the “password” by which the control unit recognises
the key and only in this condition can theengine be started.

The car is delivered with a key with metal insert (upon request for models/markets
where required) and a key with remote control. For models/markets where required
two keys with remote control can be provided.
KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL(for versions/markets
where applicable)
The fixed metallic insert A-fig. 2 operates:– the ignition switch;– the driver’s door lock;

A0A0736m– the passenger’s Air bag deactivation (upon request for versions/markets where applicable);– the fuel filler cap lock.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfect
efficiency of the electronic devices contained
inside the keys, they should never be directly
exposed to the rays of the sun.

Alfawiki.nl

6

fig. 1

fig. 2

4-07-2008

11:58

Together with the keys the CODE card isprovided (for versions/markets where applicable) (fig. 3), bearing in print the key
codes (both mechanical and electronic for
emergency start up).
The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place , not in the car.
The driver should always keep the electronic CODE card with him/her in the eventof having to carry out emergency starting.

Pagina 7

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLFor versions/markets where applicable,
the key is fitted with (fig. 4:– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– button (B) for remote opening of thedoors and turning the electronic alarm off

The metal insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver’s door lock– the passenger’s Air bag deactivation
switch (on request for versions/markets
where applicable)– the fuel filler cap lock.

– button (C) for remote closing of thedoors and turning the electronic alarm on– button (D) for remote boot opening

If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and theCODE card.

– tow hook ring (E)GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB– button (F) for power-assisted openingof the metallic insert.

A0A0003m

A0A0705m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 3

fig. 4

7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNING
When button (F) ispressed, take the utmost
care to prevent the metal insert
from causing injury or damage
when it comes out. Button (F) must
only be pressed when the key isaway from the body, in particular
the eyes, and from objects that coulbe spoilt (e.g. clothes). Never leave
the key unattended to prevent
anyone, especially children, fromholding it and pressing button (F)inadvertently.

Pagina 8

To insert the metallic insert in the key grip,press the button (F) to release the insert
and turn it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks. Once it clicks into position, release the button (F).
To open the doors by remote control, press
the button (B), the doors will unlock and the
direction indicators will flash twice. To closethe doors by remote control, press the button(C), the doors will lock and the direction indicators will flash once. By pressing button(B) the doors unlock, if in the next 60 seconds neither a door or the boot open, the system will automatically lock them.
On cars fitted with electronic alarm system,
pressing button (B) turns the alarm off,pressing button (C) turns the alarm on while
the transmitter sends the code to the receiver. This rolling code changes at eachtransmission.

Alfawiki.nl

8

OPENING THE TAILGATEThe boot can be opened by remote control
from outside pressing button (D), also whenthe electronic alarm is on. The boot opening
is accompanied by a double flashing of the direction indicators; the boot closing is accompanied by a single flashing of the direction
indicators.
If the electronic alarm is fitted, when the
tailgate is opened the alarm system switches off volumetric protection and the tailgate
control sensor, the system (with the exception of versions for certain markets)”beeps”
twice.
Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system (with the exception of versions for certain markets)“beeps” twice.

4-07-2008

11:58

OPERATION
Each time the ignition key is turned to the
STOP position the Alfa Romeo CODE system
deactivates the functions of the engine electronic control unit.
Each time the car is started turning the ignition key to MAR, the Alfa Romeo CODE
control unit sends a recognition code to theengine control unit to deactivate the inhibitor. The code is crypted and variable between over four billion possible combinations, and it is sent only if the system control unit has recognised the code transmitted from the key which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial woundaround the ignition switch.

Pagina 9

If the code has not been recognised correctly, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(Y) on the cluster turns on.
In this case, the key should be moved to
the STOP position and then back to MAR;if the lock continues, possibly try again withthe other key provided with the car. If it isstill not possible to start the car, follow the
instructions given in the “In an emergency”
chapter and then contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
IMPORTANT Every key has its own
code, which must be memorised by the system control unit. To memorise new keys, up
to a maximum of eight, apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorised Services taking withyou all the keys in your possession, theCODE card, a personal identity document
and the car’s ownership documents.

The codes of any keys notpresented during the memorising procedure are
erased. The reason for this is to ensure that any lost or stolen keys
cannot be used to start the engine.

IMPORTANT Turning on of the Alfa
Romeo CODE warning light (Y) when travelling with the ignition key at MAR:GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

1) If the warning light turns on, this meansthat the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop). At the first stop,
it will be possible to test the system: switch
off the engine turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the ignition key to MAR:the warning light turns on and should go off
in about one second. If the warning lightstays on, repeat the procedure described previously leaving the key at STOP for over
30 seconds. Should the inconvenience persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

9

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

2) For versions without the reconfigurable
multifunction display, the flashing of thewarning light means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device. Thiscondition for cars with reconfigurable multifunction display is shown by the turning onof the warning light together with the display of the message: “CODE SYSTEM NOT PROGRAMMED”. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services immediately to have all the keys
memorised.
If after about 2 seconds
with the ignition key atMAR, for versions without
reconfigurable multifunction display, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light (Y) turns on again flashing, or for versions with reconfigurable multifunction display, thewarning light turns on again together with the message “CODESYSTEM NOT PROGRAMMED”, thismeans that the code of the keys
has not been stored, therefore thecar is not protected by the Alfa
Romeo CODE system against attempted theft. In this case contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the key codes stored.

Pagina 10

KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENTTo change the battery:

If when the button (B C or D-fig. 4) ispressed, the command is rejected or not carried out, the battery may be replaced withother of an equivalent type available fromnormal outlets.

– press button (A-fig. 5) and move themetal insert (B) to the open position;

Dead batteries are harmful for the environment.
They must be disposed ofin special containers as specified bycurrent regulations. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

A0A0006m

Alfawiki.nl

10

fig. 5– using a finely-tipped screwdriver, turnthe opening device (C) and pull out the battery holder (D);– replace the battery (E) making sure thatthe bias is correct;– insert the holder back in the key andlock it, turning the device (C).

4-07-2008

11:58

ELECTRONIC ALARM
DESCRIPTION
The system comprises: a transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors. The electronic alarm is controlled
by the receiver incorporated in the instrument cluster and it is turned on and off by
the remote control in the key which sends
the crypted and variable code. The electronic
alarm controls: the unlawful opening ofdoors, bonnet and boot (perimetral protection), operation of the ignition key, battery
cable cutting, the presence of moving bodies in the passenger compartment (volumetric protection), any abnormal raising/sloping of the car (for versions/markets where applicable) and central door locking. It also makes it possible to cut off thevolumetric protection.

Pagina 11

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with incorporated remote control. Should a
new key with remote control be necessary
for any reason during the life of the car, contact directly Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,taking with you the CODE card, a personal
identity document and the car’s ownership
documents.

ACTIVATING THE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and boot shut andthe ignition key in the STOP or PARK position (key removed), point the key with theremote control in the direction of the car, thenpress and release the button (C-fig. 6).
With the exception of certain markets, thesystem sounds a “beep” and the doors arelocked.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnosis phase characterised by achange in the frequency at which the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard
flashes. If an anomaly is detected the system gives off a furter beep.

IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor function is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

A0A0010m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 611

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Surveillance
After switching on, the flashing of the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard indicates the system surveillance mode. The
led flashes throughout this period.
IMPORTANT Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the rulesof the different countries.

Pagina 12

Self-diagnostic functions
and door, bonnet, boot control

HOW TO DEACTIVATETHE ALARM

If, after engaging the alarm, a second“beep” is sounded, switch off the systempressing the button (B-fig. 6), check thatthe doors, bonnet and tailgate are properly
shut, then switch the system on again pressing the button (C).

To deactivate the alarm press the button (Bfig. 6) of the key with remote control. The
system will react as follows (with the exception of certain markets):

Otherwise, the door, bonnet or tailgate thatis not shut properly will be excluded fromthe alarm system control.
If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut correctly and the control signal is repeated, thesystem self-diagnostic has detected a system operating fault. It is therefore necessary
to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

A0A0005m

Alfawiki.nl

12

fig. 7– two brief flashes of the direction indicators– two brief “beeps” of the system– door unlocking.
IMPORTANT If when the system isturned off the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on
the dashboard stays on (maximum 2 minutes or until the ignition key is set to MAR)the following should be borne in mind:

4-07-2008

11:58– if the led continues flashing, but at different intervals than normal, this means thatdifferent attempts to break in have occurred.
Through the number of flashes it is possible to identify the type of attempt:
1 flash:one or more doors

2 flashes:

tailgate

3 flashes:bonnet4 flashes:

ultrasounds

5 flashes:

abnormal car lifting/sloping (for versions/markets
where applicable)

6 flashes:

tampering with car starting
cables

7 flashes:

tampering with battery cables or cutting emergency
key cables

8 flashes:

connection line to sensors
and siren

9 flashes:at least three causes ofalarm.

Pagina 13

WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
When the system is on, the alarm comes
into action in the following cases:– opening of one of the doors, bonnet or
tailgate;– disconnection of the battery or sectioning of electric cables;– intrusion in the passenger compartment,
for example breakage of windows (volumetric protection);– attempt to start the engine (key in
MAR position);– abnormal car lifting/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable).
Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the siren
and hazard warning ligths (for about 26 seconds). The ways of operating and the number of cycles may vary depending on themarkets.
A maximum number of cycles is howeverenvisaged.
Once the alarm cycle has ended, the system resumes its normal control function.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
To make sure that the protection system
works correctly the side windows and sunroof (if fitted) must be properly shut.
The function can be cut off (if, for example, leaving animals in the car) carrying out
the following operations in rapid succession:
starting from the condition with the ignition key at MAR, move the key to STOP,
then immediately back to MAR and thento STOP again, then remove the ignition
key.
The deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard lights up for about 2 seconds to confirm that the function has been cut off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

To restore volumetric protection, move theand keep the ignition key at MAR for over
30 seconds.
If, with the volumetric protection function
deactivated, an electric control controlled by
the ignition key at MAR (e.g. power windows) turn the ignition key to MAR, operate the control and move the key to
STOP in a maximum time of 30 seconds.
This way volumetric protection is not restored.

Alfawiki.nl

13

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 14

HOW TO CUT OFF
THE ALARM SYSTEMIGNITION DEVICE

IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start
move the key back to STOP and repeat.

To deactivate the alarm system completely (for instance during prolonged inactivityof the car) simply lock the car turning the
key in the lock.

SWITCH (fig. 8)

The ignition switch has a safety device
which prevents passage to AVV when theengine is running.

MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATION
In accordance with the law in force in eachcountry, on the subject of radio frequency,
we wish to point out that for the markets inwhich the transmitter needs to be marked,
the certification number is given on the component.
Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be given on the transmitter
and/or on the receiver.

The key can be turned to one of four positions:– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine inhibitor engaged, steering lock engaged, services excluded apartfrom those supplied directly (e.g. hazard
warning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.
IMPORTANT Do not leave the key inthis position when the engine is stopped.
– AVV: unstable position for starting theengine.

A0A0016m

Alfawiki.nl

14

fig. 8– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights switched on automatically.
IMPORTANT To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) on the switch
must be pressed first.

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNING
When leaving the car, always remove the key fromthe ignition to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls. Never leave children unattended in thecar. Remember to engage the handbrake and if the car is facing uphill,
first gear and if the car is facing
downhill, reverse.

If the ignition device istampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked over by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
before travelling again.

Pagina 15

STEERING LOCKEngaging:– move the key to STOP or PARK, thenremove the key and turn the steering wheelslightly to facilitate the locking action.
Disengaging:– turn the key to the MAR position andgently rock the steering wheel.

WARNING
Never remove the key
with the car on the move.
The steering wheel would lock automatically the first time the steering wheel is turned. This also occurs if the car is towed.

DOORS
WARNING
Before opening a door, always make sure that it canbe done safely.

OPENING/CLOSING FROMOUTSIDE
Front door on driver’s side
– To open the driver’s door turn the key
clockwise and then remove the key and pull
the handle (A-fig. 9).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB– To close the door turn the key counterclockwise.

WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out aftermarket operations on the car which would tamper with the steering wheel or column (for example the installation of
the antitheft system) and mightcause not only the system and warranty decay, but also serious safety problems and alter the car typeAlfawiki.nl
approval compliance.

A0A0017m

fig. 915

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Front door on passenger’s side
– To open the door, deactivate the centralized locking and pull the handle.
– To close the door, push the flap.

Pagina 16

OPENING/CLOSING FROMINSIDE
Front doors– To open the door, pull the handle(A-fig. 11).

Rear doors (5-door versions)– To open the door, deactivate the centralized locking and pull the handle (A-fig.
10).

– To close the door, pull the flap. To prevent the door from being opened from outside press the button (A-fig. 12) on thedashboard, the deterrent led (B) on the button will turn on with a yellow light to confirm locking.
Rear doors (5-door versions)– To close the door, push the flap.

The rear doors can only
be opened if the child safety lock has been released.

A0A0324m– To open the door pull the handle (Afig. 13).
– To close the door pull the flap.
fig. 11
A0A1001m

A0A1002m

A0A0324m

Alfawiki.nl

16

fig. 10

fig. 12

fig. 13

4-07-2008

11:58

CENTRAL LOCKING
This allows central locking of the door
locks.
To engage central locking, the doors mustbe perfectly shut, otherwise locking is denied.
IMPORTANT With central locking engaged, pulling the inside lever for opening
one of the front doors causes the unlocking of all the doors.
In the event of a power cut off (blown
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to work the lock by hand.

Pagina 17

CHILD SAFETY LOCK
(5-door versions)
The rear doors are equipped with a special
device (fig. 14) which prevents the door
being opened from inside.
IMPORTANT Each device only acts on
the door on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with thedoors open:
position 1 – device engaged (doorlocked);position 2 – device released (door canbe opened from inside).

WARNING
Always use this device
when carrying children.

WARNING
After activating the safety
device on both rear doors,
check that it is working correcttly
by pulling on the inner lever used
to open the door.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

A0A0325m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1417

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

FRONT SEATSWARNINGAny adjustments are to be
carried out only with the
car stationary.

A0A0020m

Pagina 18

The car upholstery can resist wear resulting fromthe normal use of the car.
However, it is necessary to avoid
excessive and/or prolonged friction with clothing accessories suchas metal buckles, studs, velcro andsimilar material, as this friction,acting locally and with a high pressure over the knitted fabric, maycause some threads to break andthus damage the seat cover/lining.

Alfawiki.nl

18

fig. 15LENGTHWISE ADJUSTMENT(fig. 15)
Raise the lever (A) and push the seat
backwards or forwards; in the driving position the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

WARNING
After releasing the adjustment lever, always checkthat the seat is locked on the runners, trying to move it to and fro.
The lack of this clamping action
could cause the seat to move unexpectedly and cause loss of carcontrol.

4-07-2008

11:58

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT(fig. 15) (upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) upwards, then work the lever (up and down)
until reaching the required height, then release it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards, then work the lever (upand down) until reaching the required
height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated in the driver’s seat.
BACK REST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 15)
This can be done by turning the knob (C)until the desired position is reached.

Pagina 19

BACK REST TILTING (fig. 15)
To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.
A recovery mechanism with memory
makes it possible to take the seat back to
its previous position.
Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that it
is correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indicates that the seat back is not clamped.

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 16)(upon request for versions/markets
where applicable)
The armrest can be adjusted, raised andlowered.
To adjust, slightly raise the armrest, thenpress the the release device (A).
Inside the armrest there is an oddments
compartment, to use it, raise the cover,pressing the device (B).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

Also check that the seat is firmly locked on
the runners, trying to move it to and fro.
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 15)
Adjustment is done by turning the knob(D) until reaching the most comfortable position.

A0A0023m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 16

19

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

SEAT WARMING (fig. 17)
Seat warming, fitted on certain versions,is turned on and off through the switch (A)on the outer side of the seat.
Switching on is shown by the lighting upof the led (B) on the switch itself.

Pagina 20

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT(fig. 18)
To increase passengers’ safety, the headrests are adjustable in height.
To adjust, press the button (A) and movethe headrest up or down until it clicks into
place.
IMPORTANT The configuration of theheadrest cushion may vary depending on
the versions and markets. The purpose of
the illustration is only to show how it is adjusted.

WARNING
Remember that the head restraints must be positioned
so that they are supporting the backof the head and not the neck. They
will only be able to provide effective
protection in the event of a collision
if they are in this position.

REAR POCKET (fig. 19)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The front passenger’s seat is provided witha pocket in the rear of the seat back.

A0A0024m

A0A0025m

A0A0026m

Alfawiki.nl

20

fig. 17

fig. 18

fig. 19

4-07-2008

11:58

REAR SEATS
The car upholstery can resist wear resulting fromthe normal use of the car.
However, it is necessary to avoid
excessive and/or prolonged friction with clothing accessories suchas metal buckles, studs, velcro andsimilar material, as this friction,acting locally and with a high pressure over the knitted fabric, maycause some threads to break andthus damage the seat cover/lining.

Pagina 21

EXTENDING THE
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Removing the rear parcel shelf

The split of rear seat makes it possible toextend the luggage compartment totally or
partially, acting separately on one of the twoparts, thereby offering different possibilities
of load depending on the number of rearpassengers.

– free the ends of the two rods (A-fig.
20) supporting the parcel shelf (B) pullingthe eyelets (C) off the pins (D);WARNING
If a particularly heavy load
is placed in the boot, whentravelling at night, it is wise tocheck the height of the high beams(see “Headlamps” paragraph).

Proceed as follows:– release the pins (A-fig. 21) at the outside of the shelf from their housings (B) obtained in the side supports, then remove theshelf pulling it outwards.
Once the shelf beneath the rear window
has been removed, it can be arranged in two
ways:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB– across in the luggage compartment as
illustated in fig. 22;– across between the front seat backs andthe tilted cushions of the rear seats when
the luggage compartment is completely extended (see fig. 26).

A0A1004m

A0A0028m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 20

fig. 2121

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Total extension
Proceed as follows:– fit the buckles of the seat belts (A-fig.
23) in their housings (B) on the cushion;– pull the handles in the centre of the cushions, then tilt them forwards;

Pagina 22– raise the headrests to the maximum
height and then press both the buttons (Afig. 24) on the two supports side, then pull
the headrests upwards and remove them;– move the seat belts to the side extending them correctly without twisting;– raise the levers (A-fig. 25) retaining
the back rests and tilt them forwards to obtain a single loading surface (fig. 26).

Partial extension
For partial extension, proceed as follows:– tilt the cushion required pulling the handle at the centre of the cushion, then tilting the actual cushion;– raise the headrest to the maximum
height and then press both the buttons on
the two supports side, then pull the headrest
upwards and remove them;– move the seat belt to the side extending
it correctly without twisting;

A0A1003m– raise the lever (A-fig. 25) retaining
the back rest and tilt.

fig. 22
A0A0029m

A0A1005m

A0A1065m

Alfawiki.nl

22

fig. 23

fig. 24

fig. 25

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 23

To restore the seat normal
position

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT(fig. 27)

Proceed as follows:

The car is fitted with headrests for the side
and central seats.

– move the seat belts to one side extending them correctly without twisting;– raise the back rests and push them backwards until you hear them click into position, then check that they are locked correctly by making sure that the “red band”(B-fig. 25) on the lever top side is nolonger visible. If this “red band” is still visible it means that the seat is not locked correctly;

The headrests can be set in 2 positions(high/low) according to the passenger’s
height.
If needed, it is possible to remove theheadrests operating as described above (see“Extension of luggage compartment”).

WARNING
Remember that the head restraints must be positioned
so that they are supporting the backof the head and not the neck. They
will only be able to provide effective
protection in the event of a collision
if they are in this position.

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 28)
To use the armrest (A), present only on
certain versions, lower it as illustrated.

– put the cushions back into horizontal position keeping the central seat belt raised;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB– refit the headrests in their housings.

A0A0032m

A0A1006m

A0A0036m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 26

fig. 27

fig. 28

23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 24

LUGGAGE RETAININGNETSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS

Fitted only on some versions, the luggage
retaining net is useful for the correct positioning of the load and/or the transport oflight materials. The following figures 29,
30, 31 illustrate the different net fastening solutions in the luggage compartment.

The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position in rake and height.

A0A0326m

WARNING
The steering wheel position
must only be adjusted withthe car stationary.

To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 32)
pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.

WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out aftermarket operations on the car which would tamper with the steering wheel or column (for example the installation of
the antitheft system) and mightcause not only the system and warranty decay, but also serious safety problems and alter the car typeapproval compliance.

fig. 29
A0A0327m

A0A0328m

A0A1049m

Alfawiki.nl

24

fig. 30

fig. 31

fig. 32

4-07-2008

11:58

REAR-VIEW MIRROR
ADJUSTMENT

Pagina 25

OUTER

Folding (fig. 35)

Electric adjustment (fig. 34)– If necessary (for example when the sizeof the mirror causes difficulty in narrow
spaces) the door mirror can be folded in towards the car from position (A) to position(B).

– use the switch (A) to select the mirror
required (right or left);

INNER
The mirror, fitted with a safety device thatcauses it to be released in the event of aviolent crash, can be moved using the lever(A-fig. 33) to two different positions, normal or antiglare.
On some versions/markets the mirror is
automatically set in the position for the
day/night use.

– pressing the button (B) in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected previously;– position the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible only with the ignition key at MAR.

WARNING
When travelling the door
mirrors must always be inposition (A).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBWARNINGAs the driver’s door mirror
is curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.

A0A0039m

A0A0040m

A0A0041m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 33

fig. 34

fig. 35

25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 36)
The electric mirrors are fitted with heating coils which come into operation withrearscreen heating pressing the button (A)thereby defrosting and/or demisting the mirrors.
IMPORTANT The function is timed andautomatically switched off after a few minutes.

Pagina 26

POWER WINDOWSIMPORTANT With the ignition key at
STOP or removed, the power windows canbe opened for about 3 minutes and immediately deactivate at opening of one of thedoors.

IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with the “continuous automatic operation” device for both lowering and raising
the window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the window
stops in the required position by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button
again.

3-DOOR VERSIONS
Driver’ side (fig. 37)
The driver’s door panel contains the buttons that control the following windows,
with the ignition key at MAR:A - left front window
B - right front window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.

A0A0042m

A0A0043m

Alfawiki.nl

26

fig. 36

fig. 37

4-07-2008

11:58

Passenger’s side (fig. 38)
The button (A) controls the passenger’s
side window.
IMPORTANT The passenger’s window
is fitted with a device for “continuous automatic operation” only for lowering it.

Do not keep the buttonpressed when the window
is completely raised or
lowered.

A0A0044m

Pagina 27

WARNING
Incorrect use of the power
windows can be dangerous. Before and during operationof them always make sure that thepassengers are not exposed to therisk of harm caused either directlyby the windows in motion or bypersonal objects drawn or knocked
by them. When leaving the car always remove the ignition key toprevent passengers (especially children) from being injured by thepower windows inadvertently operated.

IMPORTANT On some versions after
unlocking the doors, keeping the relevant
button on the remote control pressed forabout 2 seconds will cause the windows to
open. It is necessary to keep the remotecontrol button pressed until the windows
have reached the full travel; releasing the
button before the windows reach the limit
switch, they will stop in the position they
are at that moment.

5-DOOR VERSIONS
Front door on driver’s side
(fig. 39)
The driver’s door panel plate contains the
buttons which, with the ignition key atMAR, operate the following windows:
A – left front/rear window
B – right front/rear window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.
IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with the “continuous automatic operation” device for both lowering and raising
the window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the window
stops in the required position by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button
again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 38

27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Fitted only on some versions:C – rear door window control inhibitor(with the inhibitor activated the button led
is on, press again to renable the rear buttons).
D – (REAR) front/rear window control
switch (with the button led on, the buttons(A) and (B) operate the rear windows, withthe led off, they operate the front windows).
Front door on passenger’s sideand (on some versions) rear doors(fig. 38)
On each door panel plate there is a button(A) which controls the related window.
IMPORTANT The passenger’s window
is fitted with a device for “continuous automatic operation” only for lowering it.

Pagina 28

SEAT BELTS

WARNING
Never press button (C)when travelling.

USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
Fasten the belt by inserting the tab(A-fig. 40) into the clip (B), until hearing the locking click.

Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again without
jerking.

When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the weebing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.

To unfasten the seat belts, press button (C).
Guide the seat belt with your hand while itis rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.

Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown infig. 41.
IMPORTANT The centre rear seatbelt isinstalled on request only for versions/markets on which it is required.

A0A1007m

A0A0045m

A0A1008m

Alfawiki.nl

28

fig. 39

fig. 40

fig. 41

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNINGTo offer the highest level ofprotection, the rear seatbelts should be fastened as shownin fig. 41.

Pagina 29

WARNING
After putting the backrest
into its normal position after tilting, make sure the seat belts
are positioned correctly for use .

WARNING
The correct locking of thebackrest is ensured by thedisappearance of the “red band”(B-fig. 42) on the backrest tilting
levers (A). If the “red band” is stillvisible it means that the backrest
is not correctly locked. When
restoring its normal using position
make sure you hear the backrest
click into position.

WARNING
Check that the backrest iscorrectly locked on bothside (“red bands” (B-fig. 42) not
visible) to prevent the backrest
from tilting and injuring passengers.

WARNING
Remember that in the eventof an accident, any passengers occupying the rear seats who
are not wearing a seat belt not only subject themselves to great personal risk, but constitute a danger
to the occupants of the front seats.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

A0A1074m

When the rear seats are not occupied theappropriate spaces between the backrestand cushion should be used to stow the seatbelt clips neatly.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4229

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT(upon request for versions/markets
where applicable)
The height of the seat belt attachment
should always be adjusted to suit the heightof the person wearing the seat belt. This precaution makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the seat belt which greatly reduces
the risk of injury in the event of an accident.
The correct adjustment is obtained when
the belt passes about half way between the
tip of the shoulder and the neck.

Pagina 30

The ring attached to the front seat belts
can be moved to several positions allowing
the belts to be adjusted.
To adjust the attachment, raise or lower
the grip (A-fig. 43) of the locking device,at the same time moving the ring (B) to themost appropriate of the allowed positions.

WARNING
The height of the seat belts
shall always be adjustedwith the car stationary.

WARNING
After adjustment, always
check that the slider (B-fig.
43) is anchored in one of the positions provided. To do this, withthe grip (A-fig. 43) released, exert a further pressure to allow theanchor device to catch if release did
not take place at one of the preset positions.

LOAD LIMITERS

A0A0419m

Alfawiki.nl

30

fig. 43

To increase passive safety, the front seatbelt reels contain a load limiter which allows
controlled sag in such a way as to dose theforce acting on the shpulder during the belt
restraining action.

4-07-2008

11:58

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, the car is fitted with pre-tensioning devices. These devices “feel” that the car isbeing subject to a violent impact by way of
a sensor and rewind the seat belts a few
centimetres. In this way they ensure thatthe seat belt adheres to the wearer before
the restraining action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the pretensioner has intervened; the seat belt cannot be drawn back up even when guiding
it manually.
IMPORTANT The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.

Pagina 31

The pretensioner needs no maintenance or
lubrication. Any modification to its original
features will nullify the retractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusual natural events(floods, high waves, etc.), the device has
been affected by water and mud, it must be
replaced.

WARNING
Pre-tensioning devices canonly be used once. Afterthey have been triggered contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave them replaced. The validity ofthe device is shown on the plate
fitted on the front left door near
the lock; the pretensioners should
be changed at an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service as this date approaches.

Operations
involvingbanging, vibrations or
heating (above 100°C fora maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damage
or trigger off the device. Vibrations
from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused by mounting
pavements etc. do not have any effect on the pretensioner. If, however, you need assistance, go to Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBWARNING
Never disassemble or tamper with the pretensioner
components. All interventions must
be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

31

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSFOR THE USE OF THE SEATBELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting off.

Pagina 32

WARNING
The seat belt must not be
twisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper part
must pass over the shoulder anddiagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across thepelvis (fig. 44) and not across thestomach. Do not use devices (clips,
stoppers, etc.) which keep the belts
away from the body.

WARNINGTo ensure the highest degree of protection, you arerecommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest position
possible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis.
Seat belts should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!
Travelling without seat belt increases the risk of serious injury or
death in the case of accident.

A0A0050m

Alfawiki.nl

32

fig. 44WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the components ofthe seat belts and pretensioner betampered with or removed. Any
operation should be carried out by
qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

WARNING
If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it must
be completely replaced together
with the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNING
Each seat belt must beworn by one person only;
do not carry children on your knee
using a single seat belt for both(fig. 45). Do not fasten other objects to the body.

Pagina 33

Seat belts are also to be worn by expecting mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.
Pregnant women must of course position
the lower part of the belt very low down
so that it passes under the abdomen (fig.
46).

HOW TO KEEP
THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments.
– After a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.
– To clean the belts, wash by hand withnatural soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB– Prevent the reels from getting wet: correct operation of them is only guaranteed
if water does not get inside.
A0A0051m

A0A0052m– Replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 45

fig. 46

33

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 34

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.

WARNING
Never place cradle child’sseats on the front passenger’s seat of cars equipped withpassenger’s air bag since the air
bag activation could cause serious
injuries, event mortal. You are advised to cary children always on
the rear seat, as this is the mostprotected position in the case of acrash.

This is even more important for children.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER! If
it is necessary to carry a child on the front passenger’s
seat with the cradle child’s seat facing opposite the travelling direction,
the passenger’s air bag must be deactivated through the key switch andits deactivation must be checked
through the related warning light
F on the instrument panel (seeparagraph “Front passenger’s airbag”). In addition, the front passenger’s seat shall be adjusted in themost backward position to prevent
any contact between the child’s seatand the dashboard.

This prescription is mandatory, according
to directive 2003/20/EC, in every countryof the European Union.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is proportionately larger and heavier than the restof the body, while muscles and bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restrain them correctly inthe event of a crash, different systems areneeded than adult seat belts.

A0A0388m

Alfawiki.nl

34

fig. 47

4-07-2008

11:58

The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE-R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 0- until 10 kg in weightGroup 0+- until 13 kg in weightGroup 1

9-18 kg in weightGroup 2

15-25 kg in weightGroup 322-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group (fig. 47).
All the restraint devices must bear the homologation data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely not be removed.

Pagina 35

GROUP 0 and 0+

GROUP 1Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind (fig. 48) on a cradle seat,
which supprting the head, does not induce
strain on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 49),
through which the car seat belts restrains
both child and seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporated on it.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided with
it.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear belts normally.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided with
it.

A0A0389m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

A0A0390m

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes
seats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experimented for Alfa Romeo cars.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 48

fig. 49

35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weightgroups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and its own
belts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion.
Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.

Pagina 36

GROUP 2

GROUP 3

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part
adheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen (fig.
50).

For children from 22 up to 36 kg the child’s
chest is thick enough not to need the spacer back rest any more.
Fig. 51 shows proper child’s seat positioning on the rear seat.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided withit.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided with
it.

Over 1.50 m in height, children may wear
seat belts like adults.

A0A0391m

A0A0392m

Alfawiki.nl

36

fig. 50

fig. 51

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 37

PASSENGER’S SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Vehicle complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to the following
table:
Rear seat for 3 and 5-door versions
Group

Range of weight

SEAT
Front passenger

Rear passenger
side

Rear passenger
centre (inertial
seat belt with three anchor points)

Group 0,0+

up to 13 kg

L

U

U

Group 1

9 -18 kg

L

U

U

Group 215 - 25 kg

L

U

U

Group 322 - 36 kg

L

U

U

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBKey:
U = suitable for child’s restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group

Alfawiki.nl

37

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 38

Below is a summary of the safety rules to be observed when carrying children:

8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold of them in a crash.

1) The recommended position for installing a child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the event of acrash;

9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

2) If the passenger’s Air bag is deactivated (upon request for versions/markets
where applicable) always check the warning light F on the cluster to make surethat it has actually been deactivated.
3) Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplier is obliged to attach. Keep them in the
car together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without the
instructions for use.
4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.

WARNING
If the passenger’s Air bag
is activated, children should
never travel on the front seat. The
activation of the air bag in theevent of a crash may cause mortal injuries to the child regardlessof the crash severity. Therefore
you are recommended to carry children always on the child’s restraint
system on the rear seat, as it is themost protected in the event of acrash.

5) All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at thesame time.

FRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 52, for the passenger (fig. 53,
side bags (fig. 54) and window bags (fig.
55).

A0A1009m

fig. 52
A0A0057m

6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.
7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.

Alfawiki.nl

38

fig. 53

4-07-2008

11:58

FRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a safety device that comes into action in
the event of a head-on collision.

A0A1010m

fig. 54
A0A1011m

fig. 55

Pagina 39

It is formed of an instantly-inflating cushion contained in a special recess:– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;– in the dahsboard and with a larger-sizedcushion for the passenger.
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a device designed to protect the occupantsin the event of a head-on collision of medium-high severity by the interposition of thecushion between the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard.
In the event of a crash, the electronic control unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and when necessary
triggers inflation of the cushion.
The cushion inflates instantly as a protective barrier between the occupants’ bodies
and the structures which could cause injury.
The cushion deflates immediately afterwards.
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always beworn, as specifed by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.
Alfawiki.nl

Front Air bags are designed to protect car’s
occupants in front crashes and therefore nonactivation in other types of collisions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc...)is not a system malfunction.
In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of ice
or snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from behind by another car), side collisions, wedging under other cars or protective barriers(for example under a lorry or guard rail) cutting in of the air bag is not activated as it
does not offer any more protection than theseat belts, therefore activaton would be inappropriate.
Therefore the failure to be triggered does
not mean that the system is not working.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBWARNING
Never put stickers or otherobjects on the steering wheel,on the cover of the passenger’s Air
bag or on the right side cover of theroof. Never put objects on the dashboard in front of the passenger (forexample mobile phones) which mightinterfere with the correct inflation of
the passenger’s Air bag and therefore
injure the car’s occupants.

39

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
The passenger’s front Air bag has been designed to improve the protection of a person
wearing a seat belt. Its volume at maximum
inflation fills most of the space between thedashboard and the passenger.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER:
The car is fitted withfront passenger’s air bag. Neverplace cradle child’s seats on the front
passenger’s seat of cars equippedwith passenger’s air bag since the air
bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal. In the case ofneed, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag when a child’s seatis placed on the front seat. The front
passenger’s seat shall be adjusted in
the most backward position to prevent any contact between child’s seatand dashboard. Even if not ruled bylaw, for better protection of adults
you are recommended to reactivate
the air bag immediately as soon as achild transport is no longer necessary.

Pagina 40

MANUAL DEACTIVATIONOF PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)

WARNING
Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ignition key removed.

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
front air bag can be deactivated.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in
the special key switch on the right-hand sideof the dashboard (fig. 56). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.

The key switch (fig. 56) has two positions:1) Passenger’s front Air bag active: (ONposition P) warning light on check panel
off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry children on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on checkpanel on; it is possible to carry children protected by special restraint systems on thefront seat.

A0A0061m

The warning light F on the check panel glows steadily until the passenger’s Air
bag is reactivated.
Deactivation of the front passenger’s Air
bag does not prevent operation of the side
Air bags.
With the door open the key can be inserted
and removed in both positions.

Alfawiki.nl

40

fig. 56

4-07-2008

11:58

SIDE AIR BAGS(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)
The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occupants in the event of a side crash of medium-high severity.
They are formed of two types of instantaneously-inflating cushions:– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is always possible to have the cushion in the optimum position in relation to the passenger,
regardless of the adjustment of the seat;– the window bags, which are “curtain”
cushions, are housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which makes it
possible to extend the cushion downwards.
This solution, designed to protect the head,
makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the wide
cushion inflation surface.
In the event of a side crash, an electronic
control unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.

Pagina 41

The bags inflate instantaneously, setting
themselves between the body of the front
passengers and the car door. The bags deflate immediately afterwards.
In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violent
crashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replace
but are complementary to the use of belts,
which you are recommended to always
wear, as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag deactivation switch, as described in the previous paragraphs.
IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.

WARNING
Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on thewindows and in the window bagarea to prevent possible injuries
during the inflation phase.

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjected
to heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violent
bumps against steps, pavements or fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

IMPORTANT The triggering of air bags
releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployedbag and the car interior may be covered withdusty residue: this may irritate the skin andeyes. In the event of exposure, wash withneutral soap and water.

WARNING
Never lean head, arms andelbows out of the window.

Alfawiki.nl

41

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

The deadlines concerning the pyrotechnical charge and the twisted contact are
shown on the label placed on the front doors(lock area). As these deadlines approach go
to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethem replaced.
IMPORTANT If an accident has triggered the air bag, Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services must be contacted to have the devices activated replaced and to have thewhole system checked.
All operations involving checking, repairingand replacing components concerning the Air
bag must be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should
be contacted beforehand to have the system
deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructions
for use and of the above warnings and be
given this “Owner’s Manual“.
IMPORTANT The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.

42

Pagina 42

GENERAL CAUTIONSWARNINGIf warning light ¬ does
not come on turning the ignition key to MAR or stays on
while travelling, there might be a
failure in the restraining systems;in this case the air bags or pretensioners may not activate in theevent of a crash or, in a more limited number of cases, may activateby mistake. Before going on, ask
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tocheck the whole system immediately.
WARNING
Do not cover the back restof the front and rear seatswith trims or covers whose use is
not compatible with Side-bags.
WARNING
Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of thechest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. between your lips. Serious injury may
result in the case of the air bag beAlfawiki.nl
ing triggered.

WARNING
Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles. Do not drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back wellagainst it.
WARNING
If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been subjected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Never put stickers or otherobjects on the steering wheel,on the cover of the passenger’s Air
bag or on the right side cover of theroof. Never put objects on the dashboard in front of the passenger (forexample mobile phones) which mightinterfere with the correct inflation of
the passenger’s Air bag and therefore
injure the car’s occupants.

4-07-2008

11:58

WARNINGYour are reminded thatwhen the igntion key is engaged and in the MAR position, theAir bags can be triggered also on a
stationary car, if it is bumped byanother moving car. Therefore,
even with the car stationary, never allow children on the front seat.
You are also reminded that withthe car stationary, without the key
engaged and turned, the Air bags
are not triggered in the event of an
impact; in this case the failure to
trigger the air bags should not be
considered a system failure.

Pagina 43

WARNING
Turning the ignition key to
MAR the warning light F(with the passenger’s front Air bag
deactivation switch at ON) turns
on for about 4 seconds, and then
flashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Air
bag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.

WARNING
Do not wash the seat backwith pressurised water or
steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).

WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the
support handles.

WARNING
The air bag does not replace
the seat belts, but increases
their effectiveness. Additionally, as
the front air bags are not triggered
for head-on collision at low speed,side crashes, crashes from behind or
overturning, in these cases the occupants are protected only by theseat belts, which must, therefore, always be fastened.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBWARNING
The front Air bags are designed to be triggered forheavier crashes than the pretensioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be triggered for crashes within the two
activation thresholds.

Alfawiki.nl

43

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

STEERING WHEEL
LEVERS

Pagina 44

Sidelights (fig. 58)

Main beams (fig. 60)

The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.

To turn the main beams on, set the knurledring to position 2 and push the lever towards the dashboard (stable position);
warning light 1 on the instrument panel
will turn on.

The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be activated with the ignition key at MAR.

The 3 warning light on the instrument
cluster will come on at the same time.

LEFT-HAND LEVER

These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to 2.

The left-hand lever controls the outer lights
except for the fog lamps and rear fog
guards.

Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 59)

To set dipped-beams back pull the lever towards the steering wheel.

A0A0063m

A0A0065m

When the outer lights are switched on, thevarious controls on the dashboard are illuminated.
Only with the ignition key at PARK, regardless of the position of the knurled ring,
the sidelights and number plate lights stayon.
Position (1 or 2-fig. 62) of the levercauses the turning on only of the sidelights(front and rear), on the right or left respectively.

fig. 57

fig. 59
A0A0064m

A0A0066m

Lights switched off (fig. 57)
When the pointer in the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O, the outer lights are
switched off.

Alfawiki.nl

44

fig. 58

fig. 60

4-07-2008

11:58

When the dipped beam headlights and thefog lamps are switched on, the outer lightcontrol unit (integrated in the Body Computer) works according to the following logics:– turning on the main beams, the dippedbeams turn off while the fog lamps stay on,
when restoring the starting condition atdipped beam setting;

Pagina 45

Flashing (fig. 61)
The headlights are flashed pulling the levertowards the steering wheel (instable position) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on thecluster will come on at the same time.
IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties follow local
regulations.

or– turning on the main beams, the fog
lamps turn off and then turn on again automatically as the main beams are switched
off.
Therefore, in the event of Body Computer replacement, the outer light operating logic may be different.

Direction indicators(fig. 62)
Regardless of the position of the knurled
ring, moving the lever to the stable position
will:

One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument cluster at thesame time.
The lever is returned to its position automatically and the indicators are switched off
when the steering wheel is straightened.
IMPORTANT If you wish to signal a
rapid change of direction involving only aminimal movement of the steering wheel,
the lever can be removed up or down without it clicking (unstable position). When released, the lever will return to its home position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

up, position (1) - engage the right-handdirection indicators.
down, position (2) - engage the left-handdirection indicators.

A0A0067m

A0A0068m

A0A0067m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 61

fig. 62

fig. 6345

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 46“Follow me home” device(fig. 63)

Windscreen wiper - Windscreen
washer (fig. 64-65)

This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for the length oftime set, and is activated with the ignition
key at STOP or removed, pulling the lefthand lever towards the steering wheel.

The lever can be moved to five different
positions, corresponding to:
A - Windscreen wiper off.
B - Intermittent.

This function is activated pulling the lever
within 2 minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each single movement of thelever, the staying on of the dipped beams
and sidelights is extended by 30 seconds up
to a maximum of 3.5 minutes; the lights
switch off automatically after the time set.

C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
A0A0070m

E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).

Each time the lever is operated, the 1
warning light on the cluster turns on.

Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

This function can be interrupted by keeping the lever pulled towards the steering
wheel for more than 2 seconds.

IMPORTANT When the wiper is on, engaging reverse gear automatically turns on
the rearscreen wiper.

RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper and windscreen washer.
The control used to activate the windscreen
washers also activates the headlight washers, if fitted.

Alfawiki.nl

46

With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:■= intermittent slow.
■■= intermittent medium.
■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = intermittent fast.

fig. 64

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 47“SMART WASHING” FUNCTION

Rain sensor (fig. 66)

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer.

The rain sensor (A), fitted only on certain versions, is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper which has
the purpose of automatically adjusting thenumber of wipes during intermittent operation to the intensity of the rain.

Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time; indeed, the latter comes into action automatically if the lever is pulled for more thanhalf a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke” after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

Turning the knurled ring (F-fig. 64) it
is possible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker change fromstationary, when the windscreen is dry, tofirst continuous speed (continuous, slow).

All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.

Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.

The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 64) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

When the rain sensor is reactivated in thisway, the wiper performs at least one stroke,even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate thatreactivation has occurred.
A0A0071m

A0A1012m

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turn controls the wiper motor.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 65

fig. 66

47

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.
The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

Pagina 48

Headlamp washers (fig. 69)

Rearscreen wiper - washer(fig. 67-68)
Pushing the lever towards the dashboard(unstable position) operates the rearscreen
washer jet and continous operation of therearscreen wiper. Operation ends when thelever is released.
Turning the knurled ring (A) from position
O to position ' operates the rearscreen
wiper intermittently.

These come into operation when the windscreen washer is turned on with thedipped/main beam headlights on.
IMPORTANT On certain versions when
the headlamp washer is operating, the climate control system automatically engages
inside air re-circulation, to prevent the smellof liquid detergent from entering the passenger compartment.

The activation of the rear windshield wiper
occurs also with the front windshield wipe
on and reverse gear inserted.

A0A0073m

A0A1013m

A0A0075m

Alfawiki.nl

48

fig. 67

fig. 68

fig. 69

4-07-2008

11:58

CRUISE CONTROL
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator pedal. This reduces driving fatigue during long
journeys because the speed memorised is
automatically maintained.
IMPORTANT The device can only be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190
km/h.

Pagina 49

The device is disengaged automatically in
any of the following cases:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;– if the ASR, MSR OR VDC systems cut in;– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;– inadvertently moving the Selespeed
gear control lever to N.

– ON is the normal operating position of
the device. When the ring (A) is in thisposition, the warning light Ü on the instrument cluster turns on.

CONTROLS (fig. 70)
Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring(B) and by the RES button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:– OFF in this position the device is deactivated;

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.

Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car sped or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.
Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed memorised.

Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speed
increases or lowers by about 1.5 km/h.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will bemaintained automatically.
The RES button (C) resets the memorised
speed.

WARNING
Cruise Control must be activated only when theroute and traffic allow a constant
speed for a sufficiently long distance completely safely.

A0A0077m

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7049

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 50

TO MEMORISE
THE SPEEDTO RESET THE
MEMORISED SPEEDTO REDUCE THE
MEMORISED SPEED

Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.

If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:

The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);

The car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following conditions takes place:– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th
speed);

2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

– pressing the brake pedal;– press the RES button (C).

– pressing the clutch pedal;– if the ASR, MSR or VDC systems cut in;– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;– inadvertent movement of the Selespeed
gear control lever to position N.
IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.

TO INCREASE THE
MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:
1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning thering to (B) for more than three seconds);or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B) to(+): each pulse of the ring will correspond toa slight increase in speed (about 1.5 km/h),
while pressing continuously wull correspondto a continuous speed increase. Releasing thering (B) the new speed will be memorised
automatically.

Alfawiki.nl

50

4-07-2008

11:58

RESETTING THE MEMORISED
SPEED
The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

WARNING
When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutraland do not move the Selespeed selector to N.

It is advisable to engage the cruise control
only when the conditions of the traffic orroads so permit under completely safe conditions, i.e.: straight and dry roads, dual carriage ways or motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or in heavy traffic conditions.

Pagina 51

WARNING
Cruise control may only beengagedatspeedsbetween 30 and 190 km/h.

The device may only be engaged in 4th,
5th or 6th gear, depending on the speedof the car. Travelling downhill with the device engaged the car speed may increase
more that the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.

The ring (A) may be left constantly at ON
without damaging the device. You are, however, advised to switch the device off when
not in use, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
memorising speeds by accident.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GBWARNING
If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services after checking
that the protection is intact.

Alfawiki.nl

51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 52

DASHBOARD

A0A1115m

fig. 7152

1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Outer light control lever - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Tailgate release button - 6. Card
holder (upon request for versions/markets where applicable) - 7. Radio (upon request for versions/markets where applicable) - 8. Centre swivel
air vents - 9. Fixed upper vent - 10. Glass holder (upon request for versions/markets where applicable) - 11. Fog lamp button (upon request forversions/markets where applicable) - 12. Hazard warning light switch - 13. Rear fog guard button - 14. Passenger’s front Air bag - 15. Glovecompartment - 16. Door locking button - 17. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 18. Cigar lighter - 19. Ashtray - 20. Temperature sensor - 21. Windscreen/rearscreen wiper control lever - 22. Ignition key and switch - 23. Horn - 24. Steering wheel locking/release lever
Alfawiki.nl- 25. Driver’s front Air bag - 26. Set of controls - 27. Bonnet openining lever.

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 53

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Versions withdigital multifunction display
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display) - E. Clock/outside temperature display - F. Rev counter
NOTE On JTDM versions the scale bottom
is at 6000 revs.

A0A1111m

fig. 72 - petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display) - E. Clock/outside temperature display - F. Rev counter
NOTE On Q2 diesel versions the scale bottom is at 6000 revs.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 73 - Black Line petrol versions

A0A1127m

53

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 54

Versions with reconfigurable
multifunction display
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge warning light - C. Speedometer - D.
Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip
recorder with headlamp position display) - E.
Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev
counter
NOTE On JTDM versions the scale bottom
is at 6000 revs.
A0A1112m

fig. 74 - petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge warning light - C. Speedometer - D.
Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip
recorder with headlamp position display) E. Reconfigurable multifunction display
F. Rev counter
NOTE On Q2 diesel versions the scale bottom is at 6000 revs.

Alfawiki.nl

54

fig. 75 - Black Line petrol versions

A0A1129m

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

Pagina 55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Versions with reconfigurable
multifunction display
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge warning light - C. Speedometer - D.
Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip
recorder with headlamp position display) - E.
Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev
counter

A0A1113m

fig. 75a - 2.0 T. SPARK Selespeed versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge warning light - C. Speedometer - D.
Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip
recorder with headlamp position display) - E.
Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev
counter

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 75b - 2.0 T. SPARK Selespeed Black Line versions

A0A1130m

55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:58

MILEAGE RECORDER
Odometer display with double meter (total and trip) and headlamp position display.

Pagina 56

To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 76) on the plate at the side of thesteering column pressed for a few seconds.
IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected the trip meter reading is not stored.

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the position relating to the headlamp
aiming device.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden highering of
the speed, this is normal as it takes place during normal operation, for example when engaging the climate control system or the fan.
In particular a slow change in the speed preserves the battery charge.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 76

The danger zone (red, or white on certain
versions) indicates excessively high engine
speed. Do not drive for long periods with thepointer in this area.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection
control system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is “over-revving”
resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.

– the trip meter on the second line (4 figures)

A0A1118m

56

REV COUNTER

4-07-2008

11:58

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE WITHRESERVE INDICATOR
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
The warning light K turns on to indicate thatapprox. 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.
IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading on
the gauge may differ from the actual amountof fuel in the tank and changes in level may
be indicated late.
This condition falls within the operation logics of the electronic control circuit to avoid
highly unstable readings due to swaying of
the fuel when travelling.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key at
STOP. If the engine is off but the key is atMAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily
be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be considered asa system malfunctioning.

Pagina 57

ENGINE COOLANT FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE WITH
MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT
This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Normally the pointer should be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer reaches the higher temperatures of the scale (redsection, or white on certain versions) the request for car performance should be decreased.

IMPORTANT The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red section, or white on certain versions) when the car is driven at low speeds,
especially when the ambient air temperature is high. In this case it is advisable tostop the car and switch off the engine fora few minutes, after which the journey canbe resumed, preferably at a higher speed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

001-057 Alfa 147 Q2 GB

The turning on of the u warning light (versions with digital multifunction display) orof the message + symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) indicatesthat the coolant fluid temperature is toohigh; in this case, stop the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

57

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 58

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
The digital multifunction display shows the following: clock, outside temperature, buzzer setting (buzzer on/off), rheostat (light adjustment),
condition of the inertial fuel cut-off switch (FPS on) and engine oil level (for JTD versions).
CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 77)
To make use of the information the digital display (with the ignition key at MAR) is able to give, you should firstly familiarise with the control buttons on the plate at the side of the steering column, using them as described in the following paragraphs. Before doing anything at all,you are advised to read this chapter in full.

A0A1117m

To increase the value displayed
Press for less than 1 second (pulse), indicated with Q in the following descriptions, to access the various adjustments

Press for more than 2 seconds, indicated with R in the following descriptions, to confirm the choice required and return to the previous display
fig. 77

To decrease the value displayed

Alfawiki.nl

58

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 59

CLOCK (fig. 78)
Adjusting the hours
Press the MODE button in Q, the hours
will flash. Set the hour required using button▲ or ▼.
Every press on the button will increase by
one unit.
Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the value required, release the control and complete adjustment
with single presses.
Then press the MODE button in R to
store.

clock andoutside temperature display

A0A0009m

Adjusting the minutes

BUZZER (fig. 79-80)

Press the MODE button twice in Q, theminutes will flash. Set the minutes required
using button ▲ or ▼.

The buzzer which accompanies the controls may be activated (ON) or deactivated(OFF); proceed as follows:

Every press on the button will increase by
one unit.
Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the value required, release the control and complete adjustment
with single presses.

Press the MODE button 3 times Q, thenuse button ▲ or ▼ to turn the buzzer onor off.
The press the MODE button in R to
store the condition chosen.

Then press the MODE button in R to
store.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GBOUTSIDE TEMPERATURE (fig. 79)
Outside temperature can be viewed on thedisplay lower side, under the hour indication. When the outside temperature is below or 3° C, the indicator starts flashing
together with the buzzer, to warn the driverabout the possible presence of ice on theroad. The acoustic signal lasts about 2 seconds, while the outside temperature indicator flashes for about 10 seconds. The signal of possible presence of ice on the roadis repeated only if the outside temperature
is over 6° C and then reaches again 3° C.

buzzer activated display (ON)

A0A0083m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 78

fig. 7959

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 60

LIGHT RHEOSTAT (fig. 81-82)
This function makes it possible to adjust
the lighting (dimming/increasing) of the instrument cluster, odometer display (total
and trip meter, headlamp aiming device display) of the clock/outside temperature display and of the radio display.
To access the light rheostat, open themenu by pressing button MODE, select “ILLU” (first option displayed) by pressing
again button MODE and then set the required level using buttons ▲ or ▼).
“ILLU” function is available when at least
the side/taillights on.

is turned off with the exception of the
speedometer.
Keeping the ▲ button pressed (on theplate at the side of the steering column) for
more than 4 seconds the compelte cluster
lighting is turned on again.
display
with minimum brightness

A0A0012m

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH ON DISPLAY (fig. 83)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The display shown appears automaticallywhen the inertial fuel cut-off switch cuts in,following a crash of a certain magnitude.
The switch shuts off the supply of fuel.
IMPORTANT See the description in theControls paragraph under the Inertial fuelcut-off switch.

Partial lighting
Keeping the ▼ button pressed (on theplate at the side of the steering column) for
more than 4 seconds the instrument cluster
fig. 81buzzer deactivated display (OFF)A0A0014m

display
with maximum brightness

A0A0013m

inertial fuel cut-off switch
on display

Alfawiki.nl

60

fig. 80

fig. 82

fig. 83

A0A0007m

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 61

Engine oil level check(JTD versions)
Turning the ignition key to MAR the digital multifunction display shows the writing“OIL” for about 10 seconds.
Then, the engine oil level is detected forsome seconds, during which the display
shows six bars. At the end of this operation,
the display will show the oil quantity (fig.
84) and then the information concerning
the partial and total kilometres travelled.
Fig. 84 refers to the correct engine oil
display. As the oil level gradually falls, thefull bars go off.

IMPORTANT To make sure that the engine oil level displayed is correct, carry out
the check with the car on the level ground.
Fig. 85 refers to the display with an oillevel below the foreseen minimum. In thiscondition the display shows the flashing bars
and the message “OIL” for about 10 seconds.

Fig. 87 refers to the display with an oillevel above the foreseen maximum. In thiscondition the display shows the message“HIGH OIL”.
IMPORTANT In this case, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services who will restore
the correct engine oil level.

IMPORTANT In this case the correct engine oil level should be restored as soon as
possible, see “Checking levels” in the “carmaintenance” chapter.

A0A0713m

In case of fuel system failure, after turning the ignition key to MAR, the display
shows only the message “OIL” flashing forabout 10 seconds (fig. 86).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

fig. 86
A0A0711m

A0A0712m

A0A0714m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 84

fig. 85

fig. 87

61

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 62

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
The reconfigurable multifunction display isable to display all the useful and necessary
information when driving, in particular:

INFORMATION ABOUTCAR CONDITIONCONTROL BUTTONS fig. 89- Trip computer;

MODE

INFORMATIONON STANDARD DISPLAY- Lighting adjustment (rheostat);

Short pressing of button to confirm
the choice required and/or move to the nextscreen;Long pressing of button to confirm thechoice required and return to the standard
screen;- Display of failure messages with corresponding symbol;- Clock (A-fig. 88);

- Display of warning messages with corresponding symbol (e.g.: possible iceon road);- Outside temperature (B);- Date (C).

- Gear selected (only for 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed versions);- Engine oil level (only JTDM versions).

▲/▼ to scroll up/down the “Setupmenu” options or increase/decrease the value displayed .

A0A9117g

A0A1117m

Alfawiki.nl

62

fig. 88

fig. 89

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 63“SETUP MENU”
In addition there is a “Setup Menu” which makes it possible, through the MODE and ▲/▼ (see fig. 89) buttons, to carry out the adjustments and/or setting described on the following pages. It can be activated by pressing shortly MODE and comprises a series of functions
arranged in a “circular fashion” fig. 90.
EnglishDeutschEspãnol

Italiano

Français

MENU OFFDIMMER

Nederlands

SPEED

SERVICEBUZZERQ

TRIP B

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

UNITS
TIME

LANGUAGEDATETELEPHONE

fig. 90

Q

DST

NAVIGATION
MODE 12/24

Day

RADIO
Year

Month

From the standard screen to access navigation press the button
MODE for a short time. To navigate inside the menu press the buttons ▲Alfawiki.nl
or ▼. For safety reasons, when the car is moving, it is possible to access only the limited menu (adjustment of instrument panel lighting on“DIMMER” and setting at “SPEED”). When the car is stationary it is possible to access the extended menu.

63

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 64

Engine oil level check(JTDM versions)
Turning the ignition key to MAR the display shows the engine oil level for some seconds. During this phase, to clear the display
and move to next screen, press the MODE
button shortly.

Fig. 92 refers to the display with an oillevel below the foreseen minimum. In thiscondition the bars are all empty.

Fig. 93 refers to the display with an oillevel above the foreseen maximum. In thiscondition the bars are all full.

IMPORTANT In this case the correct engine oil level should be restored as soon as
possible, see “Checking levels” in the “Car
Maintenance” chapter.

IMPORTANT In this case, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services who will restore
the correct engine oil level.

IMPORTANT To make sure that the engine oil level displayed is correct, carry out
the check with the car on a level ground.
Fig. 91 refers to the correct engine oillevel display. As the oil level gradually falls,
the full bars go off leaving room for the empty ones.

A0A9101g

A0A9102g

A0A9103g

Alfawiki.nl

64

fig. 91

fig. 92

fig. 93

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 65

DIMMERSPEED

To cancel the set value:

With this function it is possible to adjust thelighting (dimming/brightening) of the instrument cluster, odometer display (total andtrip meter), headlamp aiming display, radio
display, radio-navigator display (if fitted) andtwo-zone climate control (if fitted).

With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h) (or mph) which, if
exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer
and displays a specific message (see chapter “Warning lights and indications”).

❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows OFF;To adjust, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows a graduated scale;❒ press the buttons ▲/▼ to carry out
adjustment.
❒ press the MODE button briefly to returnto the menu screen or press the button
for a longer time to return to the standard screen.
Partial lighting
Keeping the ▼ button pressed for morethan 4 seconds, the rev counter lighting isturned off.
Keeping the ▲ button pressed for morethan 4 seconds, the complete instrument
cluster lighting is turned on again.
IMPORTANT In the event of any faults,
lighting adjustment (rheostat) is not possible and the display is shown at its maximum
brightness.

To set the limit speed, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly andthen use the ▲/▼ buttons to set the
speed required (during setting operation,
the value flashes on the screen).

❒ press the ▼ button: the display showsOFF;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB❒ press the MODE button briefly to returnto the menu screen or press the button
for a longer time to return to the standard screen.
IMPORTANT The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h or between 20
and 150 mph depending on the unit set previously (see paragraph “UNITS” described later). Every press (pulse) of the ▲/▼ button increases or decreases by one unit. Keeping the ▲/▼ button pressed obtains fast
increase or decrease. When you are near therequired setting, release the button and complete adjustment with single presses.

Alfawiki.nl

65

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 66

TRIP BTIME

DATEWith this option it is possible to turn
ON/OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip)
which displays the figures relating to: AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE SPEED B,
TRAVEL TIME B and TRAVEL DISTANCE B during a “partial mission” contained in the “general mission” (for further information see“Trip Computer”).

With this function it is possible to adjust theclock (hours - minutes).

With this function it is possible to adjust thedate (day - month - year).

Proceed as follows:

Proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE briefly: the display
shows the hour;❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows the date;❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust theday;

To turn on/off this function, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select activation
or deactivation;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the
button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

❒ press the MODE button briefly to adjust the minutes (instead pressing the
button for a longer time you return tothe standard screen);❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.
IMPORTANT Each press on the ▲/▼button increases or decreases by one unit.
Keeping the ▲/▼ button pressed obtains
the automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the required value, release the button and complete adjustment
with single presses.

Alfawiki.nl

66❒ press the MODE button briefly to adjust the month (or press the button fora longer time to return to the standard
screen);❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to adjust the year (or press the button for alonger time to return to the standard
screen);❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the
button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 67

DST (SUMMER TIME)

MODE 12/24

RADIO

With this option it is possible to turn
ON/OFF the summer time function (whichcorresponds to + 1 hour in relation to the
daylight time).

This function is used to set the clock in the
12h or 24h mode.

With this function it is possible to turn
ON/OFF the repetition of the information
displayed by the radio front panel on the instrument cluster display.

Proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ use the ▲/▼ buttons to select activation or deactivation;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

To adjust proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows 12h;
❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to set (12hor 24h);❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

Selecting and activating the “DST ON”
function, the display switches from daylighttime and vice versa, with no need to intervene manually on the “TIME” function described previously.

To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ use the ▲/▼ buttons to select activation/deactivation;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Selecting and activating the “RADIODISPLAY ON” function, when the radio isturned on, the dispay repeats the display on
the front panel of the radio itself.
NOTE For versions with CD MP3 soundsystem only, if the active radio source is“MP3”, the RADIO function is disabledeven if ON.

Alfawiki.nl

67

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 68

TELEPHONE

NAVIGATIONLANGUAGE

With this option it is possible to turn
ON/OFF the function which shows thename (if listed) and phone number of thecaller on the instrument panel display.

With this option it is possible, during use of
the radionavigator, to turn ON/OFF thefunction to view the pictograms shown on
the radionavigator display on the instrument
cluster display.

With this function it is possible to select thelanguage required for the texts and messages
shown on the display.

To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

To activate/deactivate proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows ON;❒ use the ▲/▼ buttons to select activation/deactivation;❒ use the ▲/▼ buttons to select activation or deactivation;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

Selecting and activating the “TELEPHONE DISPLAY ON” function, whena phone call arrives, the display shows thename (if listed) and phone number of thecaller.

Selecting and activating the “NAVIGATION DISPLAY ON” function, the instrument cluster display repeats the display(pictograms) on the radionavigator display
itself.

Alfawiki.nl

68

Proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows the “language” set previously;❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

4-07-2008

11:59

UNITS
With this function it is possible to set theunit of measurement for the travel distance(km or mi), the fuel consumption (l/100
km, km/l or mpg) and the temperature (°Cor °F).
To set the units, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly, the display shows “km” or “mi” (dependingon what set previously);❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to selectthe temperature unit (or press the button
for a longer time to return to the standard
screen): the display shows °C or °F (depending on what set previously);

Pagina 69❒ press the MODE button briefly to select the fuel consumption unit (or press
the button for a longer time to returnto the standard screen);❒ if the travel distance unit is “km”, thedisplay shows “l/100km” or“km/l”: press the ▲/▼ buttons toadjust. Instead, if the travel distance unit
is “mi” the display shows “mpg”;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the
button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.
IMPORTANT The temperature unit (°Cor °F) set on the display is also shown on thebi-zone display (if fitted) and on the radionavigator display (if fitted).

❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;

BUZZER
With this function it is possible to adjust
the volume of the buzzer which accompanies the controls in the car and any failure
signals shown on the display.
To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows the “level” of the volume
previously set;
❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

IMPORTANT In the buzzer OFF condition any buzzer failure warnings are maintained.

Alfawiki.nl

69

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

SERVICEWith this function it is possible to view the
information connected with the correct car
maintenance.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:❒ press the MODE button briefly: the display shows the deadline in “km” or“mi” depending on what set previously (see paragraph “UNITS”);

Pagina 70

IMPORTANT The programmed Maintenance Schedule includes car maintenanceevery 20,000 km; this is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, starting from 2,000 km (or miles) from thisdeadline and it is shown again every 200
km. This display can only be reset by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

❒ press the ▲/▼ buttons to view therequired information on the display;❒ press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or press the
button for a longer time to return to thestandard screen.

Alfawiki.nl

70

MENU OFF
Selecting this function you return to thestandard screen.

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 71

TRIP COMPUTER
GeneralThe “Trip computer” function gives information relating to the operating status of the car on the display. This function comprises the GENERAL
TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the the partial car mission. This function (as shown in the graph below)
is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable (reset - start of a new mission).

End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP

End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP˙˙

GENERAL TRIP

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP B˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙˙

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

Alfawiki.nl

71

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to:❒ Average consumption❒ Actual consumption❒ Average speed❒ Travel time
❒ Range❒ Travel distance
TRIP B displays the figures relating to:

Pagina 72

Displayed figures

Range

Average consumption

It shows the distance the car can still cover
before needing fuel if keeping the same driving conditions.

Represents the indicative average of consumptions from the beginning of the new
mission.

Actual consumption
It shows the variation of the fuel consumption updated constantly. If parking with engine running, the display will show “- - - -”.

Average speed❒ Average speed B

It shows the car average speed according
to the overall time elapsed from the start of
the new mission.

❒ Travel time B

Travel time

❒ Travel distance B

Time elapsed from the start of the new
mission (travel time).

❒ Average consumption B

The display shows “- - - -“ when the following conditions occur:- range value below 50 km (or 30 mi);- car left parked with engine running for
long.
IMPORTANT The variation of the autonomy value can be influenced by different
factors: driving style (see what is describedin paragraph “Driving style” in the chapter“Correct use of the car”), type of route(highways, urban, mountain, etc…), useconditions of the car (load transported, tirepressure, etc…). What was described previously must be taken in consideration whenplanning a trip.

Travel distance
It shows the distance travelled by the carfrom the start of a new mission.
At the beginning of a new mission, due
to battery reconnection (reset), the display
shows value “0.0”.

Alfawiki.nl

72

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 73

New mission

SET BUTTON

It starts when the reset operation is carriedout:

The button fitted on the right lever(fig. 94) makes it possible, with the ignition key at MAR, to access the GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B functions.

- “manually” by the user, through prolonged pressure of the SET button;- “automatically” when the “travel distance” is equal to 9999.9 km (or mi),when the “travel time” is 99:59 (99hours and 59 minutes) or after reconnecting the battery.

The SET button also makes it possible toreset the GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B functions
to start a new mission:- short pressing: to go to next screenview;- long pressing: to reset and start a
new journey.

Start of journey procedure(reset)To start a new journey monitored by the
GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key atMAR, press the SET button for more than
2 seconds.
The reset operation (pressing the SET button for more than 2 seconds) in the presenceof the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP
also makes it possible to reset TRIP B.
The reset operation (pressing the SET button for more than 2 seconds) in the presence of the screens concerning the TRIP B
also makes it possible to reset only the information associated with this function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

IMPORTANT The RANGE and ACTUAL
CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

A0A0021m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9473

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

WARNING LIGHTSAND INDICATIONSIMPORTANT The presence or absenceof the warning lights depends on the typeof engine and equipment with which the car
is fitted.

x

LOW BRAKE FLUID(red)
HANDBRAKE ON(red)

Pagina 74

Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when the handbrake is engaged.

WARNING
If the x warning light turns
on when travelling checkthat the handbrake is not engaged.
If the warning light stays on with the
handbrake off, stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light (if fitted) turns on, but it should go
off after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on (on some versions together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when the engine isoverheated. If it turns on when travelling, stop
the car leaving the engine on and slightly accelerated to further activate the circulationof the coolant fluid.
If the warning light (on some versions together with the message + symbol shown on
the display) does not go off within the next
2 or 3 minutes, stop the engine and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off aftera few seconds.
Low brake fluid
The warning light turns on (on some versions together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when the level of thebrake fluid in the reservoir falls below theminimum level, due to a possible leak in thecircuit.

Alfawiki.nl

74u

HIGH ENGINECOOLANT FLUIDTEMPERATURE (red)¬4-07-2008

11:59

AIR BAG FAILURE(red)

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off aftera few seconds.
The warning lights stays on glowing steadily if there is an operating failure in the Air bag
system.

WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not switch on turning theignition key to MAR or stays on
when the car is travelling there
might be a failure in the restraining systems; in this case the airbags or pretensioners may not activate in case of accident or, in alimited number of cases, they may
activate by mistake. Before carrying on the journey, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services to havethe system checked. The failure ofthe ¬warning light (warning lightoff) is also indicated by the flashing for more than 4 seconds of the
air bag warning light ¬.

Pagina 75v

LOW ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE (red)w

LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light (if fitted) turns on, but it should go
off after a few seconds.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light (if fitted) turns on, but it should goout as soon as the engine is started (with theengine running at idle speed a brief delay ingoing out is allowed).

WARNING
If the v warning lightturns on when the car istravelling (on some versions there
also the message + symbol shownon the display), stop the engine immediately and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

If the warning light (on some versions there
is also the message + symbol shown on thedisplay) stays on, contact immediately Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB<

4-07-2008

11:59

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)The warning light turns on glowing steadily when, with the ignition key at MAR, thedriver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.

´

INCOMPLETE
DOOR CLOSING(red)

The warning light (if fitted) turns on (onsome versions there is also the message +symbol shown on the display) when one ormore doors or the tailgate are not properly
shut.

Pagina 76

d

BRAKE PAD WEAR
(red)

The warning light (if fitted) turns on withthe brake pedal pressed (on some versions
there is also the message + symbol shownon the display) if the front brake pads areworn; in this case have them changed assoon as possible.
IMPORTANT As the car is fitted withwear sensors for the front brake pads, whenchanging them, also check the rear brakepads

Alfawiki.nl

76t

SELESPEED
TRANSMISSIONFAILURE(2.0 versions
T.SPARK Selespeed)

Transmission failure

The message is shown on the display incase of transmission failure. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon
as possible.

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 77

Reduction of gearshifting

Manual mode not available

The message is shown on the display to signal a transmission overuse by the driver.

The message is shown on the display when,with the engine running, it is not possible toselect the MANUAL mode.

The irregular use (by the driver) may start
automatically a procedure for the protectionof the system.

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

Automatic mode
not available

The message is shown on the display when,with the engine running, it is not possible toselect the AUTO mode.

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

11:59

Clutch overheating

Pagina 78

Press the brake Delayed start-up

The message is shown on the display accompanied by a buzzer when there is clutch
overheating.

WARNINGIf parking or stopping the
car uphill (e.g. at the traffic lights), do not use the accelerator to keep the car stopped, toprevent overheating and thus damaging the clutch. Instead, use thebrake pedal and press the accelerator pedal only when about toleave off. If the message remains
on the display, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
The messages are alternatively shown on
the display, accompanied by a buzzer,
when, during start up, the system recognisesthat the brake pedal is operating.
Under this condition, keep the key in the
AVV position for at least 6 seconds, withthe brake held down: the engine will start.
The system is now in the recovery mode
(maximum gear allowed: 2nd).

Alfawiki.nl

78

IMPORTANT The messages are shown
only if start-up is carried out with any gear
engaged but neutral (N).

4-07-2008

11:59

Pagina 79

Gear not available

Operation not allowed

Engage N (neutral)

The message is shown on the display, accompanied by a buzzer, in the following cases:

The message is shown on the display, accompanied by a buzzer, when the systemdoes not accept the gearshift by the control lever as the necessary conditions for accepting the gearshift are not present.

The message is shown on the display, accompanied by a buzzer, when the systemasks the driver to carry out the manoeuvre.

- when, because of a system failure, it
is not possible to change gear;or- when, because of a system failure, it
is possible only to engage 1st (1), 2nd(2) or reverse (R).

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

Shifting the gear to (N) the message on
the display must go off.

Press the brake pedal repeat operation

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GBWARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
The message is shown on the display, accompanied by a buzzer, when in some conditions, due to safety reasons, there is anattempt to change gear without pressing thebrake pedal first.

WARNING
If the message remains on
the display, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

79

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

U

4-07-2008

11:59

EOBD ENGINECONTROL SYSTEMFAILURE (amber)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

In normal conditions, turning the ignition
key to MAR, the warning light turns on,
but it should go off when the engine has
started. The initial turning on indicates thatthe warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns onwhen travelling (on some versions the message + symbol are shown on the display):
glowing steadily - means a fault in the
supply/ignition system which could cause
high emissions at the exhaust, possible lackof performance, poor handling and high consumption levels. In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however
demanding heavy effort or high speeds. Prolonged use of the car with the warning lighton may cause damage. Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services as soon as possible. The
warning light goes off if the fault disappears,
but it is still stored by the system;

Pagina 80

a flashing - indicates the possibility ofdamage to catalyst (see “EOBD system”
in this chapter). If the warning light flashes,
it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed of the engine until thewarning light stops flashing; continue thejourney at moderate speed, tyring to avoid
driving conditions that may cause further
flashing and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services as soon as possible.

If, turning the ignition
key to MAR, the U warning light does not turn onor if it turns on glowing steadily or
flashing when travelling, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services assoon as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

80

Y

ALFA ROMEO CODESYSTEM(amber)Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light (if fitted) flashes only once andthen go off. If, with the ignition key atMAR, the warning light stays on, this indicates a possible failure (see “Alfa Romeo
CODE system”).
IMPORTANT The turning on at thesame time of the U and Y warning lights
indicates a failure of the Alfa Romeo CODE
system.
For the versions equipped with reconfigurable multifunction display: if with the engine running the message + symbol are
shown on the display, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.
If, with the engine running, the Y warning light flashes (on some versions together with the message + symbol on the display), this means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device (see“Alfa Romeo CODE system” in this chapter).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave all the keys memorised.

m4-07-2008

11:59

GLOW PLUGSWARMING(diesel versions)(amber)

GLOW PLUGS WARNINGFAILURE (diesel versions)(amber)

Pagina 81

Glow plug warming failure
The warning light (if fitted) turns on (onsome versions the message + symbol are
shown on the display) when there is a failure in the glow plug warming system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon
as possible to have the fault eliminated.

Glow plug warming
Turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light turns on (on some versions it
is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction
display). The warning light turns off when
the glow plugs have reached the pre-established temperature. Start the engine as soon
as the warning light goes off.

c

WATER IN FUELOIL FILTER(diesel versions)(amber)

The warning light (if fitted) turns on (onsome versions the message + symbol are
shown on the display) when there is waterin the fuel oil filter.

The presence of water inthe supply circuit may
cause serious damage tothe entire injection system andcause irregular engine operation. If
the c warning light turns on (or,on some versions, the message +symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display)contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services as soon as possible tohave the system relieved. If thesame warning is shown after refuelling, maybe some water was
introduced in the reservoir: in thiscase turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT With a high environment
temperature, the warning light may turn on
for an imperceptible length of time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

81

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

h4-07-2008

11:59

DIESEL PARTICULATEFILTER CLOGGED(diesel versions)(amber)

The warning light (if fitted) turns on (onsome versions the message + symbol are
shown on the display) when the particulate
filter is clogged and the driving profile does
not make it possible to start automaticallythe regeneration procedure.
To allow the regeneration procedure andto clean the filter, it is advisable to keep the
car travelling until the warning light goes off(or, on some versions, the symbol goes off
on the display).

Pagina 82s

INERTIAL FUEL
CUT-OFF SWITCH(for versions/markets
where applicable)

The message on the display is shown
when the inertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered, on some versions together with thewarning light s).

WARNINGIf, after the display of themessage, the smell of fuelor leaks from the supply system
are noted, do not re-engage theswitch to avoid the risk of fire.

Alfawiki.nl

82>

INEFFICIENT
ABS SYSTEM(amber)Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light (if fitted) turns on, but it should go
off after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on (on some versions the message + symbol are shown on
the display) when the system is inefficient.
In this case, the braking system keeps its effectiveness unchanged, but without the potential offered by the ABS system.
Caution is advisable, particularly in all cases of less than perfect grip. It is also necessary to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

x

4-07-2008

11:59

INEFFICIENT EBD(red) (amber)

The turning on at the sametime of the x and >warning
lights (on some versions themessage + symbol are shownon the display) with the engine
running indicates an EBD system failure; inthis case heavy braking may cause rear
wheels to lock before time, with the possibility of skidding.

>Driving extremely carefully, immediately
contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service to have the system checked.

Pagina 83

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIR BAG
DEACTIVATED(amber)(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)

F

With the passenger’s Air bag engaged,
turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off after
approximately 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated.

WARNING
The warning light F also
shows a failure of the ¬warning light. This condition is signalled by the flashing of the F
warning light over the normal 4 seconds. In this case the ¬ warning
light may fail to signal possible faults
in the restraining systems. Before
going on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have the system checked.

á

VDC SYSTEM(if fitted) (amber)

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off aftera few seconds.
If the warning light does not go out or
stays on when travelling (on some versions
together with the message + symbol shownon the display), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates the cutting in of the VDC system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

83

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

V

4-07-2008

11:59

ASR SYSTEM(WHEEL ANTISKIDSYSTEM) (if fitted)(amber)Turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light turns on, but it should go off
after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the system is switched off. The warning light flashes when the system cuts in, to alert the driver that the system is adapting to the roadsurface grip conditions.
The turning on of the warning light (onsome versions together with the message +symbol shown on the display) also indicatesa failure of the ASR system. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon
as possible.

W

LIGHT FAILURE(amber)

Pagina 84

The warning light turns on (on some versions together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when a fault to anyone of the following lights is detected:- sidelights- braking lights and corresponding fuse- rear fog lights- number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could
be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a cut-off electric connection.

K

FUEL RESERVE(amber)

The the warning light turns on (on someversions together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when about 7
litres of fuel are left in the tank and on certain versions when autonomy is below 50
km.

Turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light (if fitted) turns on, but itshould go off after a few seconds.

Alfawiki.nl

84

R

LEFT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved
downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button
is pressed.

E

RIGHT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left indicator,
when the hazard warning light button ispressed.

34-07-2008

11:59

SIDE/TAILLIGHTS(green)

The warning light turns on when side/taillights or low beams are turned on.

Ü

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided)(green)

The warning light turns on when turning
the Cruise Control knurled ring to ON.

1

MAIN BEAMS(blue)

The warning light turns on when the sidelights or dipped beams are turned on.

Pagina 85√

POSSIBLE PRESENCEOF ICE ON THE
ROAD

On some versions the message + symbol
are shown on the display √ to warn the driver of the possible presence of ice on theroad, together with a buzzer which sounds
when the outside temperature reaches orfalls below 3° C.
The buzzer sounds for about 2 seconds
while the message is shown for about 10
seconds; after this time, only the symbol remains until the temperature exceeds 6°C or
the engine turns off.
If, during travelling, after the displayed
warning about the possible presence of ice
on the road, the temperature exceeds 6°C,
the symbol √ will go off and, if the temperature reaches again 3°C, a new message
will be shown (with the outside temperature flashing) + symbol √ accompanied bya buzzer.
WARNING LIGHT FAILURE
On some versions the display shows amessage when a fault is detected to one thefollowing warning lights: ABS warning light,
EBD warning light, ASR warning light, VDC
warning light.Alfawiki.nl

ENGINE OIL SENSOR FAILURE
On some versions the display shows amessage when a fault is detected to one thefollowing warning lights: ABS warning light,
EBD warning light, ASR warning light, VDC
warning light.
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDEDOn some versions the warning light turns
on, together with the message + symbol on
the display and the sounding of the buzzer,
when the vehisle exceeds the speed limit
set previously (see “Reconfigurable multifunction display”).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

058-085_Alfa147 Q2 GB

RANGE (Trip Computer)On some versions the message + symbol
are shown on the display when range is below 50 km.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
On some versions the message + symbol
are shown on the display 2000 km fromthe deadline given in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
The message is shown again at timed intervals, turning the ignition key to MAR
every 200 km.

85

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 86

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
A0A1019m

fig. 95

86

1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demisting side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet area
Alfawiki.nl
fixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet (upon request for versions/markets where applicable).

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 87

UPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 96)

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 97)

The vent (1) has an opening/closing control (A).

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.

Completely closed.
•I == Completely
open

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

CENTRE SWIVEL VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 96)

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):II = Completely open

Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT(fig. 98) (upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.

closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.
II = Completely open

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):Completely closed.
•I == Completely
open

A0A0085m

A0A0086m

A0A0087m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 96

fig. 97

fig. 98

87

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 88

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (upon request for versions/markets where applicable)
Below is a brief description of the heating
and manual climate control system (upon request for versions/markets where applicable).
The only difference between the two systems
is the climate control compressor button √,fitted only on the versions with manual climate
control system. To obtain the maximum functions of both systems in the different conditions of use, set the pointer on the rings of thecorresponding knobs as illustrated.

MAXIMUM COOLING POWER

fig. 99
IMPORTANT An important feature of the manual climate control
system is airdehumification. It isalways advisable to turn the climate control
compressor on to prevent possible misting.

WARNING
With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside
temperature as windows may
mist over quickly.

fig. 100

MAXIMUM COOLING POWER

MAXIMUM COOLING POWER

Alfawiki.nl

88

fig. 101

A0A0139m

A0A0107m

A0A0122m

4-07-2008

12:00

For more detailed information about thesystem and how to make the best use of it,read the instructions given in the following
pages.

Pagina 89

CONTROLS (fig. 102)
1 - Air temperature adjustment knob
2 - Fan speed adjustment knob
3 - Air distribution selector knob

The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of other fluids which are incompatible
with the system components.

4 - Climate control compressor on/off button √ (only versions with manual climate
control system)
5 - Inside air re-circulation on /off buttonv
6 - Rearscreen heating on/off button (.

A0A0088m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

At any battery removal/reconnection wait
for at least 3 minutes before starting the engine, to let theclimate control unit reset the position of the electrical actuators
controlling the temperature and theair distribution.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 10289

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
Turn the ring of knob (1-fig. 102) clockwise or counter-clockwise respectively tohigher or lower the temperature of the air
admitted to the passenger compartment.
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
Turning th ring of knob (2-fig. 102) itis possible to select one of the fan speeds topersonalise the amount of air admitted to thepassenger compartment.

Pagina 90

AIR DISTRIBUTION KNOB
Turning the knob ring (3-fig. 102), thefollowing positions are selected in sequence:
Air flow towards the upper centre, front cenvents and from the front and rear¥ treoutlets (if fitted) with the possibility of adjustment using the controls on theactual vents.
Splitting of air flow between the previous
and the lower part of the pasμ vents
senger compartment.
Air flow to the lower part of the passenger
compartment (front and rear).

w

Position 0 turns off the fan and automatically engages inside air re-circulation (shownby the lighting up of the led next to the button 5 v) thereby shutting off the inlet ofoutside air to the car.

Splitting of air flow between thewindscreen/front side windows and≤ the lower part of the passenger compartment.

To switch off inside air re-circulation, press
button (5) v.

Air flow towards the windscreen and front
windows for demisting/dey side
frosting.

If the fan is at 0 air recirculation will turnon automatically. When switching the engine
off, at next restarting if the fan is at 0 yet,
air recirculation will turn on again although previously turned off.

Flow air to allow quick demisting/defrosting of the windscreen and front side
- windows, turning on rearscreen heating for defrosting/demisting (function called
MAX-DEF)

Alfawiki.nl

90

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF
BUTTON(only versions with manual
climate control system)√

The climate control compressor is engaged
pressing button (4-fig. 102) √ and thefan is also operated automatically at first
speed even if the knob (2) is at position 0.
When the system is operating the corresponding led next to the button turns on.
The climate control compressor can only
work with the engine running and external
temperature not very low. If the climate control compressor is turned off, air re-circulationis engaged automatically, turning off the corresponding led, to prevent the windows frommisting. Inside air re-circulation may also be
engaged pressing the button (5) v. If the
fan is at 0 the climate control system compressor will not turn on.

WARNING
Operation of the climate
control compressor is necessary for cooling and dehumidifying the air; it is advisable to keep
this function always on, to prevent
window misting problems.

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 91

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v
Pressing button (5-fig. 102) v activates inside air re-circulation and the led
next to the button lights up.
In this case the climate control system directly treats the air contained in the passenger compartment, the fan is on.
To switch the air re-circulation feature off
and withdraw air from outside, press the button again.

WARNING
With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside
temperature as windows may
mist over quickly

WARNING
The inside air re-circulation
system makes it possible toreach the required “heating” or“cooling” conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.

WARNING
It is advisable to turn on
the inside air re-circulation
system v in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoided, especially with several people
on board, to avoid the possibilityof the windows mistinginside.

IMPORTANT The condition and operating mode of the climate control compressor and inside air re-circulation, shown by
the turning on of the leds next to the buttons (4) √ and (5) v, are also stored
when the engine is off. Therefore, when theengine is started the selectionschosen before turning off are resumed.
REARSCREEN HEATING
ON/OFF BUTTON(

Pressing the button (6-fig. 102) (turns on the demisting/defrosting of therearscreen, and if present, the wing mirror
heating coils; simultaneously the led next tothe button turns on. This function is timed
and switched off automatically after 20 minutes. To turn off earlier, press the button
again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

IMPORTANT The system automaticallyturns on rearscreen heating if the temperature is below 3°C.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage which mightcause it to stop working properly.

Alfawiki.nl

91

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 92

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0220m

When cleaning the insideof the rearscreen, takecare not to damage theheating filaments.

AIR COOLING
AND DEHUMIDIFYING(fig. 102/a)
To cool and dehumidify the air with the engine running and the windows shut, proceed
as follows:- temperature adjustment knob (1), pointer on blue sector.
- air quantity adjustment (2), knob pointer on the speed required to personalise theamount of air admitted- air distribution (3), knob pointer at therequired symbol.
- air vents completely open.
- compressor on enable button(4) pressed√(for versions/markets where applicable)(led next to button on) (only for versions
with manual climate control system).
Wishing to moderate the cooling action,
increase the temperature turning the knob
ring (1) towards the red sector, until obtaining the required temperature.

fig. 102/a
Proceed as follows to obtain the maximum
cooling power:- set the pointer of knob (1) as far as it
will go counter-clockwise (minimum temperature blue sector);- set the pointer of knob (2) to the maximum fan speed.
- press the inside air re-circulation on button (5) v.
- set the pointer of the air distribution knob
(3) to the required position (position ¥ isrecommended).

Alfawiki.nl

92- air vents completely open.
- compressor on enable button (4) √pressed (led next to button on) (only forversions with manual climate control system).
The use of the climate control system atminimum temperature should be restricted
to short lengths of time and very hot climates, to avoid over-cooling the passenger
compartment.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 93-

Proceed as follows:- turn the ring of the air distribution knob
(3) to the - symbol.
The climate control activates all the functions
necessary to quicken demisting/defrosting of
the windscreen and side windows with timing(switching off automatically after 3 minutes),
as follows:- it turns on the climate control compressor (only for versions with manual climate
control system);- switches off air re-circulation, if engaged;- sets the maximum air temperature;- operates the fan at a predefined speed;- directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;- turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.

fig. 103
When the max def function is on, the following are on: the led next to the rearscreen
heating button (6) (, the led next to theclimate control compressor on/off enablebutton (4) √ (only for versions with manual climate control system)
IMPORTANT If the engine is not hot
enough, the function does not immediately engage the pre-established fan speed, torestrict the inlet of air to the passenger compartment that is not warm enough to demist
the windows.
After demisting/defrosting, simply use thecontrols to maintain the optimum conditionsof vision and comfort.
IMPORTANT The hotter the engine themore effective defrosting will be.

IMPORTANT In cases of heavy damp
and/or rain and/or big differences in temperature between inside the car and outside,
it is advisable to proceed as follows todemist the windows:- air re-circulation off, led next to button(5) v off;
- pointer of knob (2) at fan second speed
at least;- pointer of knob (3) on symbol ≤ withthe possibility of passing to position y if
more misting is noted;- climate control compressor button (4)√ pressed, led next to button on (only forversions with manual climate control system).
To defrost/demist the rearscreen, press
button (6) (, led next to button on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0221m

DEMISTING
AND/OR DEFROSTING THE
WINDSCREEN AND FRONTSIDE WINDOWS, REARSCREEN
AND WING MIRRORS(
MAX-DEF function) (fig. 103)

Alfawiki.nl

93086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 94

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0222m

HEATING (fig. 104)
To obtain the temperature required, proceed as follows:- temperature adjustment knob pointer (1)on the red sector as required;- air quantity adjustment knob pointer (2)on the fan speed required to personalise theamount of air admitted;- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position.
To obtain the maximum heating power proceed as follows:- knob pointer (1) as far as it will go clockwise (maximum temperature red sector);- knob pointer (2) on maximum fan
speed;- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position (position w) is recommended.
To keep the air in the passenger compartment dehumidified, you are recommended
to press the climate control compressor enable button (4) (for versions/markets
where applicable) √ (only for versions withmanual climate control system).
IMPORTANT To be able to obtain satisfactory passenger compartment warming,the engine should have reached normal operating temperature.

94

fig. 104
POLLEN FILTER(for versions/markets where applicable)
The filter has the specific capability of filtering external air, thus admitting to the passenger compartment purified air, free fromparticles such as dust, pollen, etc.
In addition to the above mentioned functions, is also reduces the concentration ofpollutants.
The filtering action is active in all air inlet
conditions and it is clearly more effectivewith the windows closed.
Have the conditions of the filter checked
at least once a year, preferably at the onset of summer by Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

Alfawiki.nl

If the car is habitually used in dusty or polluted areas, the filter should be checked andreplaced at shorter intervals than those specified in the Programmed Maintenance
Schedule.

If the filter is not replaced
the efficiency of the climate control system may
be seriously compromised up to
blocking the air flow at the outlets
and vents.

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 95

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (upon request forversions/markets where applicable)
A0A1020m

To start the system (fig. 105):- turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side - passenger’sside).
- press the AUTO button.
IMPORTANT The climate control system makes it possible to personalise thetemperatures required on the two side witha maximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s side and the passenger’s side.
IMPORTANT The climate control compressor only works with the engine runningand an outside temperature above 4°C.

WARNING
With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside
temperature as windows may
mist over quickly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

fig. 105
For more detailed information about thesystem and how to make the best use ofit, read the instructions given in the following pages.
The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage. Absolutely avoid
the use of other fluids which are incompatible with the system components. Alfawiki.nl

At any battery removal/reconnection wait
for at least 3 minutes before starting the engine, to let theclimate control unit reset the position of the electrical actuators
controlling the temperature and theair distribution.

95

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

96

4-07-2008

12:00

GENERAL
The car is fitted with a two-zone climate control system, controlled by an electronic control
unit which makes it possible to separately adjust the air temperature on the driver’s side
and on the passenger’s side. To obtain optimum temperature control in the two areasof the passenger’s compartment, the system
has an outside sensor, a passenger’s compartment sensor and a two-zone sun ray sensor. On some versions the system is integrated with an incipient misting sensor installedbehind the inside rear-view mirror, capable of“controlling” a predefined area of the windscreen inner surface which can automaticallyact on the system to prevent or reduce misting through a series of operations such as:
opening air re-circulation, enabling the compressor, air flow to the windscreen, fan speed
sufficient for demisting; in the case of heavy
misting, enabling the MAX-DEF function.
To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting sensor, stickers mustnot be applied (road licence holder,time card, etc.) in the “control”
area between the sensor and thewindscreen. Care should also begiven to cleaning the windscreen
and the actual sensor, avoiding theaccumulation of dust and other substances.

Pagina 96

IMPORTANT The demisting procedure
is enabled each time the ignition key isturned to MAR or pressing the AUTO button. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the following
buttons: compressor, air recirculation, airflow, air capacity. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until the AUTO button is pressed again or the next timethe ignition key is turned to MAR.
On certain versions, the system is integrated by an antipollution sensor capable ofautomatically switching on inside air re-circulation to lessen the harmful effects of polluted air in cities, queues, tunnels and operation of the windscreen washer (with thetypical smell of spirit).
IMPORTANT The function of the antipollution sensor is subordinate to safety conditions; therefore disabling the climate control compressor or with low external temperature, the sensor is disabled. In any case,the sensor can be re-enabled pressing therecirculation button v until taking it to
the automatic mode.

Alfawiki.nl

Air quality control is also entrusted to a
combined particle and activated carbon filter. The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parameters and functions:- inside temperature (separately on driver’s
side and passenger’s side)- fan speed- air distribution- inside air re-circulation on/off- climate control compressor on/off enable.
It is possible to change the setting of thefollowing functions manually:- fan speed- air distribution- inside air re-circulation on/off- climate control compressor on/off enable.
The control of functions not changed manually remains automatic and in any case thetemperature of the air admitted to the passenger compartment is controlled automatically according to the temperatures set on
the driver’s and passenger’s displays.
IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storage
until the user decides to resume automatic
control. The settings selected manually are
stored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time it is started.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 97

A0A1021m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLS (fig. 106)
1 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)
2 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
3 - Fan speed set and system off display(OFF)
4 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off
5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)
7 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front side
windows, rearscreen heating and wing mirror coils (MAX-DEF function -)8 - Inside air re-circulation on/off buttonv(manual/automatic)
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on/off button (10 - Air distribution selection buttons

fig. 106
11 - Inside air temperature sensor
12 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

13 - Button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO
14 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √Alfawiki.nl

97

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM (fig. 106)
IMPORTANT The knob rings do nothave a mechanical stopper therefore, oncethe maximum or minimum value has beenreached, they are free to turn in both directions.
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is advisable to set the temperatures required on the displays; then pressthe (13) AUTO button.
This way the system will start working
completely automatically to reach the temperatures set as quickly as possible and thenmaintain them.
During completely automatic system operation, the temperatures set can bechanged at any time; the system will automatically change its settings to adjust to the
new requirements.

Pagina 98

IMPORTANT To be able to be accepted by the system, the difference in the temperature between the driver’s and passenger’s side must be within a range of 7°C.
It is possible to personalise the choices
made automatically by the system interveningmanually on the following controls:- fan speed adjustment knob (4)- air distribution selection buttons (10)- inside air re-circulation on/off button (8)v- climate control on enable button (14)√.
Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the button (13) AUTO.

Alfawiki.nl

98

With one or more functions engaged manually, the adjustment of the temperature of
the air admitted to the passenger compartment continues to be controlled automatically by the system (left led on button 13
AUTO on) except with the climate control
compressor off.
In fact, in this condition the air admitted
to the passenger compartment cannot havea lower temperature than the outside air;
this condition is indicated by the turning offof the two leds on button (13) AUTO andflashing on the display (1) and/or (5) related with the temperature rate that cannot be obtained.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 99

A0A1022m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 107)
Turning the rings of knobs (2 or 6), clockwise or counter-clockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of the air required respectively in the left zone (knob 2)
or right zone (knob 6) of the passenger
compartment. The temperatures set are
shown on the displays (1) and (5) above
the knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures set
is restored automatically using knob (6).
Turning the knob rings clockwise orcounter-clockwise until they reach the extreme selections HI or LO, the maximum
heating or cooling functions are respectively engaged:

fig. 107

Alfawiki.nl

99086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 100

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1023m

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 108)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature above 32.5°C, and can be activated independently from the driver’s orpassenger’s side or both; this setting brings
the system to the “monozone” mode andis shown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when requiring to heat the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, exploiting the maximum potential of the system.
This function uses the maximum temperature of the coolant fluid, while air distribution and fan speed are controlled according
to the system settings.
This function is unadvisable withthe engine cold to prevent admitting air that is not warm enough tothe passenger compartment.

fig. 108
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 32.5°C and returns
to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the system off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature
set to a value below 32.5°C; the opposite
display will show 32.5°C.

Alfawiki.nl

100

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 101

A0A1024m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 109)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature below 16.5°C; this setting isshown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when requiring to cool the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, exploiting the maximum potential of the system.
The function cuts off air heating, engages
inside air re-circulation (to prevent admitting
hot air to the passenger compartment) andthe climate control compressor, takes air distribution to R E and the fan speed as set
by the system.

fig. 109

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the function off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature
set on a value above 16.5°C; the opposite
display will show 16.5°C.
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 16.5°C and returns
to an operating condition with automatic
temperature adjustment.

Alfawiki.nl

101

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 102

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1025m

MONO BUTTON FOR
ALIGNMENT OF THE
TEMPERATURE SET (fig. 110)
Pressing button (12) MONO automaticallyaligns the temperature on the passenger’s
side with that on the driver’s side, therefore
it is possible to set the same temperature
between the two zones simply turning thering of knob (2) on the driver’s side.
This function is provided to simplify temperature adjustment of the whole passenger compartment when only the driver is on
board.

fig. 110

Separate operation of the temperatures set
is automatically restored when the passenger uses the ring on knob (6) or presses
button (12) MONO.

Alfawiki.nl

102

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 103

Turning the ring of knob(4), clockwise orcounter-clockwise, increases or decreases
the speed of the fan, thus the amount of air
admitted to the passenger compartment;
the 16 selectable speeds are shown on abar (in steps of 3), up to a maximum of 6bars lit:- maximum fan speed = all bars lit;
- minimum fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button (14) √. To
restore automatic fan speed control, after amanual adjustment, press button (13) AUTO. Completely turning the ring of knob (4)counter-clockwise switches the system off,with the following situation: display (1) off;
display (5) off; centre display (3) with litdisplay OFF and left led on inside air re-circulation button (8) v on.
IMPORTANT Pressing the inside air recirculation button (8) v it is possible toobtain the inlet of untreated outside air tothe passenger compartment.
To turn the system on again, simply turnthe ring of knob (4) clockwise, or press any
one button, except the inside air re-circula-fig. 111

A0A1027m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1026m

FAN SPEEDADJUSTMENT KNOB
(fig. 111-112)

fig. 112
tion (8) and rearscreen (9) buttons; thisoperation restores all the operating conditions stored previously.
Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT On leaving the OFF condition, inside air re-circulation v returns
to the condition prior to switching off.

103

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 104

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1028m

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
BUTTONS (fig. 113)
Pressing one or more buttons (10) it ispossible to manually choose one of the 5possible air distributions to the passenger
compartment:
R E Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlet (if fitted).
R E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger’s compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side
outlets and the rear outlet (if fitted)(coolest air). The air flow distribution
is particularly useful in spring and autumn, when the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rear
lower parts of the passenger’s compartment. Due to the natural tendency of heat to spread upwards, thistype of distribution allows heating of
the passenger’s compartment in the
shortest time, also giving a prompt
feeling of warmth to the coldest partsof the body.

fig. 113
Q Splitting of the air flow between the
Z windscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part of the car. This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heating of
the passenger’s compartment while
preventing possible misting of the windows.
Q Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.

Alfawiki.nl

104

IMPORTANT Pressing one of these buttons turns on (led on button itself on) or off(led on button off) the associated functions
if the combination chosen is among the 5possible ones; if not it only activates themain function of the button pressed, without the possibility of turning off with anotherpress (at least in one distribution the air flow
should be spread in the passenger compartment).
To restore automatic air distribution control
after a manual selection, press button(13)AUTO.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 105√

Pressing button (14) √ enables the turning on of the climate control compressor.
This condition is shown by the lighting up of
the led on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (13) AUTO
and (14) √ go off; automatic inside air recirculation control is also excluded (both leds
off on button 8 v) which always stays
off to prevent misting the windows; even
if unadvisable, it is still possible to restore
automatic operation of inside air re-circulation pressing button (8) v.

fig. 114

A0A1030m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1029m

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF
ENABLE BUTTON(fig. 114)

With the climate control compressor off, it
is not possible to admit air to the passenger
compartment with a temperature below theoutside temperature; in this case, the value flashes on the display concerning thetemperature that cannot be reached and theleft led on button (13 AUTO - fig. 115)
goes off.
The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restore automatic control for switching on the climate
control compressor, press button (14) √again, the led on the button turns on, orfig. 115
press button (13) AUTO; in which case,however, the other manual settings set will
be cancelled.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING
Operation of the climate control compressor is necessary
for cooling and dehumidifying the air; itis advisable to keep this function always on, to prevent window misting
problems.

105086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 106

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1031m

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 116)
Inside air re-circulartion is controlled according to three operating logics:- automatic control, indicated by the turning on of the right led on the button;- forced engagement (inside air re-circulation always on), indicated by the turning onof the left led on the button (and by the rightled going off at the same time);- forced switching off (inside air re-circulation always off with air inlet from outside),
indicated by the turning off of both leds.
These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the inside air re-circulation button (8) v.
When inside air re-circulation is controlled
automatically by the system, the right led
on the air re-circulation button (8) v
stays on all the time and the left led shows
the air re-circulation condition:
on = air re-circulation operating;off = air re-circulation off.
If inside air re-circulation has been turnedon or off manually, the led on button (13)
AUTO turns off.

106

fig. 116
In automatic operation , inside air re-circulation is turned automatically when the
antipollution sensor detects the presenceof polluted air, for example in cities, queues,
tunnels and operation of the windscreen
washer (with the typical smell of spirits).

WARNING
With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with lzow outside
temperature as windows may
mist over Alfawiki.nl
quickly.

WARNING
The inside air re-circulation
system makes it possible
to reach the required “heating” or“cooling” conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 107

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1032m

WARNING
It is advisable to turn on
the inside air re-circulation
system v in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoided, especially with several people
on board, to avoid the possibility of
the windows misting.
fig. 117WARNING
In certain weather conditions (e.g.: outside temperature around 0°C) and with automatic air re-circulation control on,
mist may form on the windows. In
this case press the inside air re-circulation button (8) v, to switch
off re-circulation (led on button off)
and if necessary increase the flowof air to the windscreen.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION AUTO
BUTTON (fig. 117)
Pressing the (13) AUTO button the system automatically adjusts the amount anddistribution of the air admitted to the passenger compartment, cancelling all the previous manual adjustments.

When the right led, on button (13) AUTO is off, this means that one or more manual operations have been carried out andtherefore automatic control is not complete(except temperature control which is always
automatic) indicated by the left led on, orthat the system is in the OFF condition.

This condition is indicated by the lighting
up of both leds on the button itself.

Alfawiki.nl

107086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 108

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A1033m

QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
BUTTON(MAX-DEF function) (fig. 118)-

Pressing button (7) - the climate control automatically activates timed operationof all the functions needed to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen andfront side windows, i.e.:- it turns on the climate control compressor;- switches off inside air re-circulation, if on(both leds off);- sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (1) and (5);- operates the fan at a predefined speed;- directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;- turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting
feature is on, the led on button (7) -,the led on the rearscreen heating button (9)( (and the led on button (14) √ turn on;
at the same time the leds on button (8)v.

fig. 118IMPORTANT If the engine is not hot
enough, the function does not immediately engage the pre-established fan speed, torestrict the inlet of air to the passenger compartment that is not warm enough to demist
the windows.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the only manual operation possible are manual adjustment of the
fan and switching rearscreen heating off.

Alfawiki.nl

108

Pressing one of the following buttons
again: (7) -, (8) v, (12) MONO,(13) AUTO or (14) √ the system switches off the maximum demisting/defrosting
function, restoring the operating conditionsof the system prior to turning it on, in addition to activating the last function required,
if any.

086-109_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:00

Pagina 109

A0A1034m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

WING MIRROR AND
REARSCREENDEFROSTING/DEMISTING
BUTTON(fig. 119)(

Pressing button (9) ( (turns on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The turning on of this function is shown by
the turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.

fig. 119POLLEN FILTERIMPORTANT The system automaticallyturns on rearscreen heating if the temperature is below 3°C.

The filter has the specific capability of filtering external air, thus admitting to the passenger compartment purified air, free fromparticles such as dust, pollen, etc.

Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services at least
once a year, preferably at the onset of summer.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.

In addition to the above mentioned functions, is also reduces the concentration ofpollutants.

If the car is used mainly in dusty or polluted areas it should be checked and, if necessary, replaced at shorter intervals.

The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.

Alfawiki.nl

The failure to replace thefilter may considerably reduce the effectiveness ofthe climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the outlets and vents.

109

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 110

ADDITIONAL HEATERCONTROLS(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 120)

The car is fitted with an additional heater
which supports the engine during cold or
winter weather to quickly reach a comfortable temperature in the passenger’s compartment.
The heater works with the engine runningwhen the outside temperature is below
20°C and the engine has not yet reachednormal operating temperature.

Electric tailgate release is only allowed with
the ignition key in the ignition switch at
MAR car stationary, at STOP or PARK
for 3 minutes without opening/closing adoor. To release the tailgate, press button(A) on the centre console panel.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 120)

FOG LIGHTS (fig. 120)
(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)
These are turned on pressing button (B),on the centre console panel, when the outer lights are already on, at the same time
the led on the button itself turns on.
Press button (B) again to switch off.
IMPORTANT The front foglights should
be used in compliance with local traffic laws.

These are switched on by pressing button(C), on the centre console panel, regardlessof the position of the ignition key.
When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the switch itself begins to flash
together with the direction indicators andthe direction indicator warning lights on the
instrument cluster. This function is switched
off by pressing the button again.

A0A1035m

WARNING
Use the hazard warning
lights in compliance withlocal regulations.

Alfawiki.nl

110

fig. 120

4-07-2008

12:02

REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 120)
These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlights or fog lights on, pressing button(D) on the centre console panel, at thesame time the warning light on the button
itself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the fog
guards are automatically turned off and they
do not come on the next time the engine
is started unless button (D) is pressed. Toturn them off press button (D).

Pagina 111

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 121)
(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s door
pillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.
The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.

IMPORTANT Always use the rear fog
guards in compliance with local regulations.

WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

If no leaks are found the car can be restarted. Press button (A) to activate the fuel supply system again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM(fig. 120)
To lock the doors simultaneously, press button (E), on the centre console panel, regardless of the position of the ignition key.
The deterrent led turns on as follows:

A0A0092m– with the ignition key at MAR glowing
steadily with a yellow light;– with the ignition key at STOP flashing with a red light (deterrence condition).

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 121

111

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 112

HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE(fig. 122)
The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the car load.
To do this (only with dipped beams turnedon) use the buttons ▲/▼:– press the button to increase by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:– position 0: one or two people occupying the the front seats– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– posizione 3: driver + 350 kg in luggage
compartment– press the button to lower by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);

HAND BRAKE (fig. 123)
The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.
To operate the brake when the car is stationary, pull lever (A) upwards, until the required braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is at MAR, thewarning light on the instrument cluster x
will come on.

The display (A), in the tachometer, shows
the positions during adjustment.

WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.

WARNING
The wheels should be locked
after a few clicks of thehand brake. If it does not occur contact Alff a Romeo Authorised Services
to have the hand brake adjusted.

A0A1116m

A0A0094m

Alfawiki.nl

112 fig. 122

fig. 123

4-07-2008

12:02

To release the hand brake:– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);– keeping the button pressed lower thelever, the warning light x on the instrument cluster will go out.
To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the hand brake.
IMPORTANT The hand brake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, withthe lever pulled, button (B) is pressed.
Therefore, to release the brake, in addition
to pressing button (B), it is also necessary
to pull lever (A) further upwards to release
the safety device, then lower the lever completely.

Pagina 113

GEARSHIFT LEVER(fig. 124-125)
The position of the single gears is shownby the pictogram on the gearshift lever
knob.
When shifting gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.
For the versions with 6 gears, to engage
reverse (R) lift (with the fingers of the same
hand holding the lever) the ring (A-fig.
125) positioned under the lever.
After engaging the reverse, release thering. To change from reverse to another gear,
it is not necessary to lift the ring on the lever.

IMPORTANT On certain versions abuzzer sounds to alert the driver if the car
is moved with the hand brake engaged.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear may only beengaged with the car completely at a standstill. With the engine running, before engaging reverse gear it is necessary to wait
for at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal
fully depressed to prevent clashing and thepossibility of damaging the gears.

WARNING,To change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, there
should be no obss tacles on the floor
under the pedal unit: make surethat any mats are well laid and do
not interferee with the pedals.

A0A0095m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1077m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 124

fig. 125

113

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 114

SELESPEED
TRANSMISSION(on request for versions/markets
where applicable)
The 2.0 T.SPARK version can be suppliedwith a mechanical gearbox with electronic
control, called “Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies useof the car, reducing the fatigue of city driving or when frequent gearshifting is required, at the same time offering brilliant
performance.

This device comprises a conventional mechanical gearbox to which an electronically-operated electro-hydraulic device has been
added which automatically controls the
clutch and gear engagement. The clutch pedal has been eliminated and the car moves
off using only the accelerator pedal.
Gearshifting takes place through the control lever (A-fig. 126) which is of thefloating type with a “single central stable
position”. Using the lever it is possible to request an increase/decrease of the gear ratio engaged and/or reverse gear engagement (R) or neutral (N).

IMPORTANT To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from thestart.

A0A0097m

There are also two levers on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 127) through which
it is possible to shift gear up or down (alsowith the car stationary).
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic (then called
MANUAL), in which the driver directly requests gearshifting through the lever on thecentre console or the levers on the steering
wheel spokes;– the second i automatic, called CITY
(mode selectable with the special button Bfig. 128, the word CITY is shown on thedisplay fig. 130). With this mode the system decides directly when to shift gear.

A0A1075m

A0A1121m

Alfawiki.nl

114 fig. 126

fig. 127

fig. 1284-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 115

With gearshift to CITY gears can still beshifted manually using the gearshift lever orthe steering wheel controls. Geashift stays
in CITY.
The gear engaged (fig. 129) is shownon the display regardless of the mode selected.

In the CITY mode the selected position isshown.
A warning light connected with the corresponding failure message (“GEARBOX FAILURE”) (fig. 130) and a buzzer attract theattention of the driver in the event of a faultof the Selespeed transmission.

N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;

SYSTEM ACTIVATIONIMPORTANT Opening the driver’s door
the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part ofthe system to prepare it for when the engine is started.
Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments of the gear display (fig. 129),
the gearbox failure warning light (fig.
130) and the word CITY light up. Afterabout one second, the display indicates thegear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R).
IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the display segments do not display the gear engaged or the failure warning light stays on,turn the ignition key to STOP and wait forthe display to go off, then repeat the system activation procedure. If the fault presists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
R = reverse.

A0A9017g

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A9118g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 129

fig. 130

115

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 116

OPERATION WITH ENGINE OFF
IMPORTANT Before operating thegearshift control lever, always check the gear
engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, R).
With the engine off and the car stationary it is possible to engage all the gears.
With the car stationary and with the brake
pedal pressed, requests to shift gear are accepted both if they are carried out throughthe control lever on the central console andthe levers on the steering wheel.
To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed:– to increase gear (+) (fig. 131) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
this shifts to second, if it is in second gear
it goes to third and so on up to fifth). If thesystem is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) the

forward movement on the lever causes engagement of first gear (1).

system will engage neutral (N) and the manoeuvre will be repeated.

– to shift down (–) (fig. 131) push thelever backwards (if the car is in fifth gear it
moves to fourth, if fourth is engaged it shifts
to third and so on down to first).

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately release the gearshift control lever after making the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) makes the system automatically switch to CITY mode; everything stops releasing the gearshift lever.

To put the gearbox in neutral (N), startingfrom the condition with the car stationary andthe brake pedal pressed, it is necessary tomove the gearshift control lever to the right(fig. 132).
From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and withthe car practically at a standstill, it is possible to request engagement of reverse gear,
pushing the lever to the right and then backwards (fig. 133). If the car is on the move,the request is accepted if, within 3 seconds
from the request, the car speed is below 3
Km/h: if the request is not carried out, theA0A0101m

IMPORTANT If wanting to leave the carparked on a sloping road with a gear engaged to keep it braked, it is necessary tocheck that the display shows the new gear
engaged and then wait for 1 or 2 seconds
before releasing the brake pedal to allow
complete clutch engagement.

A0A0102m

A0A0103m

Alfawiki.nl

116 fig. 131

fig. 132

fig. 133

4-07-2008

12:02

STARTING THE ENGINE
The engine can be started with the gear
engaged or in neutral (N), provided that thebrake pedal is pressed down.
IMPORTANT Keep the brake pedal
pressed during the starting operation. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedly with the engine off, in this situation, toallow the engine to be started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on thepedal itself.
After starting, the gearbox sets to neutral
automatically, the display shows the letter(N) and the system selects the operating
mode memorised before switching off.
IMPORTANT If the engine is started
with the gearbox in a position different from
N and without the brake pedal pressed, thedisplay shows a dedicated message. In thiscase repeat the starting operation and press
the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT Should the starting-up procedure be executed with the gearbox not
in working order, carry out the “Delayed
start-up” procedure (see also the relative
messages): keeping the key in the AVV
position for at least 10 seconds, with thebrake held down, the engine will start. The
system will remain in the recovery mode
(maximum gear allowed: 2nd, Auto mode

Pagina 117

is not available). Should the engine notstart, seek assistance from the Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

WARNING
If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is alerted of the potentially
dangerous situation due to the factthat the gearbox has automatically
set to neutral by the buzzer and theedisplay.

WARNING
NEVER leave the car withthe gear in neutral (N).

WARNING
Never remove the ignition
key when the car is moving. In addition to the fact that theSelespeed s ystem would not work
properly up to stopping the car,the steering wheel would lock automatically the first time it isturned.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine turns off and the gear selected before
switching off the engine remains engaged.
If the engine is stopped with the gearbox
in neutral (N), the buzzer and the flashing of (N) call the driver’s attention so thatthe car can be put in safety conditions engaging first gear (1) or reverse (R). In thiscase, the ignition key should be turned to
MAR and with the brake pedal pressed,
engage first gear (1) or reverse ( R).

WARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine andthen turn off the Selespeed system keeping t he brake pedal
p r e s s e d : O N LY release the pedal
when the display on the cluster
has gone out.

Alfawiki.nl

117

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

MOVING OFF THE CAR
With the engine on and the car stationary,
the gears that can be engaged for moving
off are only first (1), second (2) or reverse(R).
To engage them it is possible, keeping thebrake pedal pressed, to use the gearshift
lever on the centre console as well as thelevers on the steering wheel.

Pagina 118

This is not to be considered as a fault as
it is part of the operating logic. For the same
reason, in the case of sticking on reverse
gear, the system partially closes the clutch
to allow gear engagement; in this case theengagement of reverse gear (R) will not be
as smooth as usual.
Moving off the car is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;

IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can be
engaged from any of the following other ratios: neutral (N), first (1) or second (2).
If the car is moving, the request will be accepted and carried out if, within 3 seconds
from the request, the car speed is below 3
Km/h: if the request is not accepted, thesystem will engaged neutral (N) and the
manoeuvre will be repeated.

2) gradually pressing the accelerator pedal.

The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the display and the intermittent sound of a buzzer.

WARNING
After a request to shift
gear with the car stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car move,the driver must always check thedisplay to see that the gear engaged is the onn e required.

IMPORTANT If when shifting from reverse (R)/first (1) or neutral (N)/first (1)sticking occurs on first gear, the system automatically engages second gear (2).

The more the accelerator is pressed thehigher the pickup torque.

Alfawiki.nl

118

WARNINGS– With the car stopped and a gear engaged always keep the brake pedal presseduntil deciding to move off;
– during prolonged halts with the engine
running it is advisable to keep the gearbox
in neutral;– when the car is parked facing uphill, do
not use the moving off manoeuvre to keep
the car still; use the brake pedal and press
the accelerator pedal only when deciding tomove off;– use second gear only when more control is needed for moving off manoeuvres at
low speed;– if, in reverse gear, first gear is engaged
or vice versa, shift gear only when the car
is stopped completely and with the brake
pedal pressed.

4-07-2008

12:02

Though highly unadvisable, if when travelling downhill for some unexpected reason
the car is set to neutral (N), when the engagement of a gear is requested, the system automatically engages the best gearin relation to the speed of the car to allow
the correct transmission of torque to thewheels.
When travelling downhill with a gear engaged and the accelerator released (if the
car is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch automatically to give the car adequate engine
braking.
For safety reasons the Selespeed system
activates the buzzer when:– clutch overheating occurs while the car
is being started; in this case it is necessary
to “force” starting avoiding hesitation or, if
the car is on a slope, release the accelerator and use the brake pedal to stop the car;

Pagina 119

Still due to safety reasons, with the car stationary, the engine running and gear (1), (2)or (R) engaged, the system activates thebuzzer and automatically shifts to neutral (N)when:– no action is made on the accelerator
and/or brake pedals for at least 3 minutes;– the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake are not touched for atleast 1.5 seconds.
STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary, press the brake
pedal.

OPERATING MODES
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL), in which the driver directly decides
when to shift gear;– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to the driving style.
The CITY mode is selected by pressing the
CITY button on the gearshift lever knob;
when the automatic mode is selected theword CITY is shown on the display.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Regardless of the gear engaged and the operating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY) the system automatically disengages
the clutch and shifts to a lower gear.
If deciding to move off again without having stopped the car completely, the most suitable ratio will be available for accelerator
again.
Stopping the car the system automaticallyengages first gear (1).

Alfawiki.nl

119

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 120

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)
In the MANUAL operating mode, the display shows the gear engaged.
In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.
The requests to change gear may takeplace through:– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 134);– the levers on the steering wheel (fig.
135).

If the gearshifting request compromises
the correct engine and gearbox operation,
the system will not allow gearshifting but
will automatically shift down the gears to
let the engine run idle (e.g. during decelerations).
In these cases the system informs the driver about the impossibility of shifting gears
through a dedicated message on the display
and a buzzer.
The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY (B-fig. 136) button is pressedagain, thereby cutting out the previously selected mode.

A0A0097m

When changing gear it is not necessary
to release the accelerator pedal because theSelespeed system directly controls the engine in such a way as to:– reduce and then increase engine torque;– adapt the engine speed to the latest
gear engaged.
When downshifting, the engine is accelerated automatically to bring it to the speed
necessary with the new gear ratio.
The neutral command (N) is accepted at
any car speed.
Reverse (R) is only accepted and engaged
with the car almost stationary.

A0A1121m

A0A1075m

Alfawiki.nl

120 fig. 134

fig. 135

fig. 136

4-07-2008

12:02

With the accelerator pedal pressed to over
60% of its stroke and an engine speed
above 5000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker. In the MANUAL operating mode
there are certain automatic/security devices
which simplify driving:– when slowing down the clutch is opened
and the transmission ratio is automaticallyreduced to be ready for picking up again;otherwise, when the car is stopped, thegearbox will automatically be in first gear
(1);
– requests to change gear that would takethe engine to above maximum speed or below minimum speed are not accepted;

Pagina 121

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)FAILURE WARNING

The automatic operating mode CITY is selected pressing the button (A-fig. 137)
at the base of the gearshift lever.

Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are
shown by the t (fig. 137/a) warning
light accompanied by a message and abuzzer.

In addition to the gear, the display shows
the word CITY.
The system decides directly when tochange gear depending on the engine rpm
and the driving style.
Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.

WARNING
If the warning light t
and the message areshown on the display contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon
as possible t o have the fault eliminated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

In the case of a fault to the gearshift control lever, the system automatically engages
the automatic operating mode CITY to
make it possible to reach the nearest Alfa
Romeo Authorised Service to have the fault
eliminated.

– if jamming occurs during gear engagement, the system firstly tries to engage thegear required again and, if it is still not possible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving the carin neutral.
A0A1121m

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait for
the end of a gear shifting operation before
requesting another one, to avoid multiple
requests in rapid succession.

A0A9118g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 136

fig. 137/a

121

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

In the case of a fault to other gearbox components, the system only allows the engagement of certain gears: first gear (1),second gear (2) and reverse (R).

– the system has automatically engaged
neutral (N) after:
there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;
or the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;

WARNINGIn the event of a gearbox
fault (to any component),
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
S e rvices as soon a s possible tohave the system checked over.

BUZZER WARNINGSThe buzzer is activated when:– reverse gear is engaged (R);– the car is parked with the gearbox inneutral (N); signal that can be noted turning the ignition key to STOP;– clutch overheating takes place during
pick-up;122

Pagina 122

or the driver’s door is opened and no action is made on the accelerator and brakefor at least 1.5 seconds;
or detection of a gearbox fault;

TOWING THE CAR
IMPORTANT For towing the car follow
local regulations. Make sure that the gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the car
moves if pushed) and tow as for a car withnormal mechanical gearbox following the
instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the car; contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

– in the event of gearbox failure.
PARKING THE CAR
To park the car safely it is absolutely necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse(R) and also the hand brake if the road ison a slope.
Turning off the engine with the car on an
uphill slope and a gear engaged, it is absolutely necessary to wait for the display
to go off before releasing the brake pedal,
so that the clutch is completely closed.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and wanting to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot on thebrake pedal it is necessary to engage firstgear (1) or (R).
IMPORTANTNEVER abandon the car
Alfawiki.nl
with the gear in neutral (N).

WARNING
While towing the car do notstart the engine.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 123

INTERIOR FITTINGSGLOVEBOXOn the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.

WARNING
Never travel with theglovebox open: the lid
might harm the passenger in theevent of an accident.

GRAB HANDLES

To open use handle (A-fig. 138).
When the glovebox is opened with the key
at MAR an inside courtesy light turns on(A-fig. 139).

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the glovebox, the light inside can only be turned on for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

Suitable grab handles are fitted above therear side windows.
The fitting is completed by device (B), on
the lid, for inserting a pen or pencil.

A0A0108m

For versions/markets where applicable
there is also a grab handle above the front
passenger’s door.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A0109m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 138

fig. 139

123

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 124

FRONT ROOF LIGHT(fig. 140)
The roof light comprises two courtesy lights
with corresponding control switch.
IMPORTANT When a door is opened,
the roof light turns on and timing of about
3 minutes is activated automatically, after
which it goes off; closing the doors (within
the 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7
seconds is activated to allow car starting.

Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The lights are turned off moving the ignition key to MAR (with the doors closed).
With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights are turned on when a door
is opened.
Pressing switch (A) to the left (position0), the lights stay off (OFF position).
Pressing switch (A) to the right (position
2) both lights stay on.
Switch (B) turns the lights on individually.

A0A0111m

Pressing switch (B) to the left (position0) the left light is turned on. Pressing theswitch to the right (position 2) the right lightis turned on.
With switch (B) in the central position (position 1) the lights stay off.

Alfawiki.nl

124 fig. 140

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, turning the roof light on is only possible for 15 minutes; after which the system
turns it off to avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the central position. By so doing, the roof lights willturn off when the doors are closed. Forgetting a door open the lights will turn off automatically after a few seconds.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 125

COURTESY LIGHTS(fig. 141) (for versions/markets
where applicable)
On the back of the driver’s or passenger’s
sun visor, opening the cover (A), with theignition key at MAR, the roof lights turnon (B). These lights allow use of the courtesy mirror when the light is poor.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the lights can be activated only for
15 minutes; after which the system turns
them off to avoid draining the battery.

REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 142)
IMPORTANT When a door is opened,
the roof light turns on and timing of about
3 minutes is activated automatically, after
which it goes off; closing the doors (within
the 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7
seconds is activated to allow car starting.
Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The light turns off in any case turning theignition key to MAR (with the door
closed).

A0A1043m

On the light there is a switch with threepositions.
When switch (A) is in the central position (0) the light turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the light stays off.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the light stays on.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the roof light can be turned on for
only 15 minutes; after which it is turned off
to avoid draining the battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the roof light turns
off when the doors are closed.

A0A0113m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 141

fig. 142

125

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 126

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 143)
(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

DETERRENT LED (fig. 144)

The light (A) housed in the doors turns onwhen the associated door is opened, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

The led (A) on the instrument cluster
comes into operation when the doors arelocked (ignition key at STOP or removed)
and it remains in the “deterrence” condition, flashing with a red light until the nexttime the doors are unlocked.
IMPORTANT If a door or the tailgate
are not closed perfectly, the deterrent led
flashes at a higher frequency for 4 seconds
and then flashes at normal frequency again.

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER (fig. 145)
To use the ashtray open the lid (A).
To use the cigar lighter, with the key atMAR, press button (B); after a few seconds the button will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.
Remove the tray to empty and clean theashtray (C).
The position of the cigar lighter in relation
to the ashtray and viceversa, may vary depending on the trim level.

A0A0243m

A0A0005m

A0A0114m

Alfawiki.nl

126 fig. 143

fig. 144

fig. 145

4-07-2008

12:02

WARNING
The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by children: danger o f fire and/or burning.

Pagina 127

REAR ASHTRAYS(fig. 146)
For the rear passengers there are two concealed ashtrays.
To use or remove pull in the direction of
the arrow.

GLOVEBOX(fig. 147) (for versions/markets
where applicable)
To use the glovebox push it as shown by
the arrow.

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

WARNING
Do not use the ashtray as
waste paper basket: it
might set on fire in contact withcigarette stubs.

A0A0115m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1045m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 146

fig. 147

127

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 128

CARD HOLDERAND GLASS HOLDER(fig. 148) (upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

ODDMENT COMPARTMENT ONDASHBOARD (fig. 149)

ODDMENT COMPARTMENT ON
CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 150)

An oddment recess (A) is provided on theleft of the dashboard, on the cover of thefuse box.

On the centre console, at the side of thehand brake lever, depending on the versions,the following recesses are provided:

The interior fittings are completed by theremovable card holder recess (A) and glass
holder (B) located on the centre of the dashboard. To use them, press as shown.

– oddment recess (A);– can holder (B);– magnetic card or toll ticket holder (C);– pen or pencil holder (D);– coin holder (E).

A0A0116m

A0A1048m

A0A0735m

Alfawiki.nl

128 fig. 148

fig. 149

fig. 150

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 129

POCKETSON FRONT DOORS (fig. 151)
Each front door has an oddment pocket(A).

REAR POCKETS (fig. 152)

SUN VISORS (fig. 153)

These are at the side of the rear seats inthe side trim (A).

The visors can be directed at the front andside.
For versions/markets where applicable,
behind the visors there is a courtesy mirror
with a light at the side (B). To use, open
the cover (A).
The lights allow use of the mirrors with dim
light.

A0A0117m

A0A0120m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1047m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 151

fig. 152

fig. 153

129

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 130

SUNROOFSLIDING FORWARDS/
BACKWARDSWARNING
Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous. Before and while operating it, always
make sure thh at the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sunroof in mott ion or by personal items
drawn or knocked by it.

WARNING
Do not open the sunroofwith snow or ice on it:
damage may result.

With the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 154) in the directionof the arrow, choosing one of the 6 opening positions available.
To close the roof, take the control knob(A) to the centre position.
The sunroof is fitted with a sliding curtain
below, which prevents sun radiation and isdrawn by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when it
opens and is pushed completely inside theroof panel when the sunroof is opened completely. With the closing movement, it will
come out partially so that the hand catchis accessible (fig. 155).

WARNING
Open and close the sunroof
only with the car stationary.

WARNING
When leaving the car theignition key should be removed to prevent the sunroof frombeing operatedd inadvertently andharming anyone remaining in thecar.

A0A0123m

A0A0125m

Alfawiki.nl

130 fig. 154

fig. 155

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 131

RAISING AT THE REAR

EMERGENCY OPERATIONWith the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 156) in the directionof the arrow, choosing one of the three
opening positions available.

If the electrical control device does notwork, the sunroof can be operated manually as follows:

To close the roof, move the control knob(A) to the centre position.

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The tailgate can be opened:– apply leverage in the points shown by
the arrows and remove the plate (A-fig.
157);

from the outside of the car - by aremote control impulse;– insert a special Allen wrench in the seat(B) with hexagon slot;

from the inside of the door - by depressing the button (A-fig. 158).

– then turn the wrench clockwise to open
the roof or counter-clockwise to close.

IMPORTANT If the boot is not properly shut, the ´ warning light will come on(on certain versions accompanied by themessage on the reconfigurable multifunction
display).

A0A0124m

A0A0126m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1050m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 156

fig. 157

fig. 158

131

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 132

OPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 158)

OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 159)

Tailgate is released electrically and this canbe performed only when the ignition key
is in position MAR with car at a standstillor in STOP or PARK position for 3 minutes without unlocking/locking one of thedoors.

The tailgate can be opened by remote control from outside pressing the button (A),also when the electronic alarm is engaged.
Opening of the tailgate is accompanied bya double flash of the direction indicators;
closing is accompanied by a single flash.

To unlock the tailgate, press button (A)on the centre console panel.

If an electronic alarm is fitted, with the
opening of the tailgate, the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system “beeps”
twice (with the exception of certain markets).

Tailgate raising is facilitated by the gas
shock springs.

The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
tailgate raising with theweights foreseen by the manufacturer. The arbitrary addition of
items (such spoilers, etc.) may
compromise the correct operationand safety of the actual tailgate.

A0A0131m

Alfawiki.nl

132

fig. 159

Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).
TAILGATE CLOSING
To lock, push in correspondence with the
Alfa Romeo badge to lower tailgate, until
you feel the click of the lock.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 133

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 160)
When the tailgate is opened the light turns
on automatically (A) in the right-hand sideof the boot. Closing the tailgate, the lightturns off automatically.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the tailgate, turning on thelight will only be possible for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

AEMERGENCY OPENING OFTAILGATE
To succeed in opening the tailgate from theinside, should the car battery be flat, or because of a defect of the electric lock of the
tailgate itself, proceed as follows (refer to“Extending the luggage compartment” inthe chapter “Getting to know your car”):– operate the lever (A-fig. 161) asshown to achieve the tailgate mechanicalrelease, operating from the inside of the luggage compartment;– for versions/markets where applicableunlock the lock by pulling the string(A-fig. 161/a) (the string is located inside the right recess in the tailgate).

– remove the rear headrests;– tilt the rear seat cushions;– tilt the backrests;

A0A0132m

A0A0373m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A0734m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 160

fig. 161

fig. 161/a

133

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 134

SECURING THE LOAD (fig. 162)
The loads carried may be secured withstraps hooked to the special rings (A) in theboot.
The rings also serve for fastening the luggage restrainer, if present (in any case available c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).

A0A0133m

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

WARNING
Do not load the boot above
the permitted maximum(see “Technical specifications”). Also make sure that the objects contained in the boot are well secured
to prevent them from being thrownforward,, causing harm to the passengers.

Alfawiki.nl

134 fig. 162

WARNINGA heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passengers.

WARNING
If you want to carry res e rve fuel in a can, follow
legal regulations, only using a certified cann , suitably fastened to theload securing eyelets. Even in thisway the risk of fire is increased int he case of an accident.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 135

BONNET
The bonnet opening lever is under the left
end of the dashboard.

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

To open:

To close: lower the bonnet until approx.
20 cm from the engine compartment andthen let it drop, ensuring that it is fully closed
and not just held in position by the safety
catch.
If the bonnet does not close properly do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

– pull the lever (A-fig. 163) until thebonnet clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 164) upwards.
– raise the bonnet.

WARNINGDo this only with the car
stationary.

A0A0135m

A0A1051m

WARNINGFor safety reasons thebonnet must always beclosed when the car is travelling.
For this reason alwaa ys check thatthe bonnet is closed properly making sure that the catch is engaged.
If during travee lling you realise thatthe catch is not perfectly engaged,
stop immediately and close thebonnet in the correct way.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 163

fig. 164

135

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 136

ROOF RACKPROVISION

5-door versions

3-door versions

The rear hooks are located in points (B).

The front hooks are in points (A-fig.
166).

The front hooks are in points (A-fig.
165).

IMPORTANT Closely follow the assembly instructions provided in the kit. Assembly must be carried out by skilled personnel.

The rear hooks are located in the points (B)shown by the serigraph (▼) on the side rearwindows.

WARNING
After a few kilometres,check that the fastening
screws are firmly tightened.

A0A0232m

A0A0334m

Alfawiki.nl

136 fig. 165

Follow the regulations inforce concerning maximum
clearances.

fig. 166WARNING
Distribute the load evenly
and when driving, bear inmind the increased sensitivity toside wind.

Never exceed the maximum permissible loads (see“Technical specifications”
chapter).

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 137

HEADLIGHTSCOMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 167)

The adjustment of the headlights is vital toyour safety and comfort and to that of other road users.

When the car is loaded, the beam from theheadlights is raised due to the backwards
tilt of the car.

The adjustment of the headlights is also
governed by precise regulations.

In this case the headlights must be adjusted correctly.

To do this (possible only with dippedbeams turned on) proceed as follows▲/ ▼:– press the button to increase by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);– press the button to decrease by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);
The display (A), in the tachometer, shows
the positions while adjustment is beingmade.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.
IMPORTANT A slight layer of steam(fogging) can appear on the inside surfaceof the beam transparent cover: this is nota defect. The presence of condensate traces
in beams is a natural phenomenon, due toa low temperature and to the degree of humidity in the air. These traces will disappear
when the beams are turned on. Drops of water inside the headlight indicate instead water infiltration: contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1116m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 167

137

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 138

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 168-169)– position 0: one or two people occupying the the front seats

The dipped-beam headlights are adjusted
for circulation in the country in which the car
is marketed. In countries with opposite circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming cars it
is necessary to cover the areas of the headlight as shown below; this is done using nontransparent sticker tape.

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– position 3: driver + 350 kg stowed inluggage compartment

The illustration refers to passng from righthand drive to left-hand drive.

WARNING
Check beam aiming every
time the load carriedchanges.

A0A1038m

A0A1037m

Alfawiki.nl

138

fig. 168

fig. 169

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 139

PARKING SENSORSACTIVATION(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)

The sensors are activate automaticallywhen reverse gear is engaged.

These sensors are located in the car rear
bumper (fig. 170); their function is to detect and warn the driver , through an intermittent buzzer, about the presence of obstacles in the car rear area.

TOWING TRAILERSBUZZER

The operation of the rear
sensors is automaticallydeactivated as soon as theelectric cable plug of the trailer isinserted in the car tow hook outlet.

Engaging reverse gear an intermittent
buzzer is automatically activated.

The rear sensors are automatically re-activated when the trailer cable plug is removed.

As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car diminishes,the buzzer frequency will
increase.

The buzzer:– increases as the distance between the
car and the obstacle diminishes;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB– becomes continuous as the distance between the car and the obstacle is below approx. 30 cm and stops immediately if the
distance increases.

A0A1053m– remains constant if the distance between the car and the obstacle is the same,
while, if this situation occurs for the side sensors, the signal is interrupted after about 3
seconds to avoid, for example, signallingin the event of manoeuvres along the walls.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 170

139

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS braking system,
which prevents the wheels from locking whenbraking, makes full use of the grip and within the limits of the grip available, keeps the
car controllable also in emergency braking.
When braking a slight pulsing accompanied
by noise may be felt on the brake pedal dueto the action of the ABS system.
This should not be interpreted as a braking
malfunction. It is the signal to the driver that
the ABS has come into action: it is the warning that the car is travelling at the limit of its
grip and therefore the speed should be adapted to the type of road.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebraking system; in the event of a failure it disabled, leaving the braking system in the same
conditions as a car without ABS. In the caseof failure, the anti-lock action is no longer present, the braking capacity of the car is notadversely affected at all.
If you have never previously used cars fittedwith ABS, it is advisable to practice a little ona slippery surface, naturally in safety conditions and in accordance with the local Highway Code; you are also advised to read thefollowing instructions carefully.

Pagina 140

The advantage of the ABS over a conventional system is that it makes it possible toobtain the highest degree of handling also
when braking completely under limited grip
conditions, preventing the wheels from locking.
However, with the ABS do not expect thebraking distance to always shorten: for example, on soft surfaces like gravel or fresh
snow or a slippery surface, the space might
increase. To better exploit the possibilities of
the antilock system in the case of need, theadvice given below should be followed.

WARNING
The ABS better exploits thegrip available, but cannot
increase it; caution is therefore necessaryy on slippery surfaces, without taking unnecessary risks.

WARNING
If the ABS cuts in it meansthat the limit of the grip isbeing reached between the tyreand the road surface: it is therefore
necessary to slow down to adapt
driving to the grip available.

Alfawiki.nl

140

WARNING
When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the pulsing on thepedal, do not lighthen the pressure,but keep the pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the least space possible,
compatibll y with the conditions of
the road surface.
Always take due care when braking on
bends, even with the help of the ABS.
The most important advice of all, however, is this:WARNINGIn the event of a system
failure, with the turning onof the > warning light on the instrument cluster, have the carchecked immediately by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services drivings l o w l y, to be able to have the system restored to fully efficient conditions.
Following these instructions you will bein the best braking condition under all circumstances.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 141

IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS may
only be fitted with the wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of type and brand approved by
the Manufacturer.
The system is completed by the EBD (Electronic Brake Distributor) which distributes thebraking action through the control unit and the
ABS system sensors.

WARNING
If the compact spare wheel
is used, operation of the
ABS system is cut off and the >warning light on the instrument
cluster turns on.
WARNING
The car is fitted with anelectronic braking distributor (EBD). If the > and x w a r ning lights turn on simultaneouslywith the engine running, this indicates an EBD system failuu re; in thiscase with sharp braking the rear
wheels might lock too early, withthe possibility of skidding. Driving
extremely carefully, go to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service
to have the s ystem checked.

IMPORTANT If the battery is run down
the > and x warning lights might turn on
when starting the engine and go off after
starting. This should not be considered asa fault but as a warning that during starting the ABS is not active. The turning offof the warning lights ensures normal system
operation.

WARNING
The turning on of only the> warning light with theengine running normally indicatesa fault to the ABS system only. In
this casee the braking system is still
efficient, though without the aidof the anti-lock device. Under
these conditions performance of
the EBD system may be reduced.
In this case too, you are advised
to go imm
m ediately to the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorised Service tohave the system checked over, driving in such a way as to avoid
sharp braking.

WARNING
If the low brake fluid levelx warning light turns on,stop the car immediately and contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised See rvice. Any loss of fluid
from the hydraulic system will negatively affect the operation of thebraa king system be it of the conventional type or of the type with ABS.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

141

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 142

VERSIONS WITH VDC SYSTEMEXCLUDEDWARNING
After using the spare wheel
and refitting the standard
wheel, it is necessary to travel for
approx. 30 km (20 minutes) on amixed road or approx. 15 km (10minutes) on a highway until the software o f the ABS/ASR control unit
recognises the size of the “normal”
wheel; in this period of time the carr
may slightly go adrift on a side during brakig and the ASR warning light(if fitted) may come on.. Therefore
it is recommended to travel carefully and to avoid, where possible,
sharp braking. On c ars fitted with
ASR travel for the above mentioned
distance with the ASR turned off
through the suitt able button.

VDC SYSTEM(Vehicle Dynamics Control)(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)
It is an electronic system that controls the
car stability and, in the lack of grip, it helps
to bring the car back to the correct direction.
The action of the VDC system is particularly useful when the road grip conditions
change.

WARNING
The performance of thesystem should not induce
the driver to take pointless andunnecessary r i s k s . T h e s t y l e o fdriving must in any case always
be adapted to the conditions of
the road surface, visibb ility andtraffic. The responsibility for roadsafety is always and in any casethe driver’s .

Alfawiki.nl

142

HOW THE VDCSYSTEM WORKS
The VDC system is engaged automatically when the car is started and cannot beswitched off.
CUTTING IN
OF THE VDC SYSTEM
The cutting in of the VDC system is indicated by the flashing of the á warning lighton the instrument cluster, to inform the driver that the car is in critical conditions of stability and grip.

4-07-2008

12:02

VDC SYSTEM FAILUREWARNINGIn the event of a failure of the VDC systemdisengages automatically and the á warning light on the instrument cluster turns on
glowing steadily, together with the message
on the reconfigurable multifunction display.
In the event of a VDC system failure thecar behaves like a car not fitted with this system: in any case it is advisable to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as
possible.

Pagina 143

WARNING
During use of the compact
spare wheel, the VDC system continues working. It should
be borne in minn d that the spare
wheel is smaller than a normal
tyre, therefore its grip is lower
than that of the o ther tyres of thecar.

WARNINGFor the VDC system towork correctly, the tyres
must be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, inn perfect conditions and above all of the specified type, brand and size.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

143

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

ASR SYSTEM(Antislip Regulation)(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)
The ASR function controls the car drive andcuts in automatically every time one or bothdriving wheels slip.
In slipping conditions, tow different control
systems are activated:
1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,
being caused by excessive power transmitted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

Pagina 144

The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of dynamic load changes
or excessive acceleration.
– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions of
the road surface.
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozen
surfaces.
– in the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).

2) if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is slipping, with
an effect similar to that of a self-locking differential.

Alfawiki.nl

144

WARNING
The performance of thesystem in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointlee ss and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must in
any case be adapted to the conditions of thh e road surface, visibility and traffic. Road surface is alw a y s t h e d r i v e r ’s responsibility.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 145

SWITCHING ON
THE ASR FUNCTION
The ASR function switches on automatically each time the engine is started.
When travelling the device can be switched
off and on again pressing switch (A-fig.
171).
When the function is turned off, the instrument panel warning light (V) turns on.
If the function is switched off when travelling, it will turn on again automatically thenext time the engine is started.

WARNING
During use of the compact
spare wheel, the ASR function is cut off and the V warning
light on the instrument cluster
turns on glowing steadily together with the message on the reconfigurable multifunction display.

WARNINGFor correct operation of the
ASR system the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brandand type on a ll wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of thespecified type, brand and size.

ASR SYSTEM FAILURE
INDICATIONIn the event of a fault, the ASR systemswitches off automatically and the V warning light on the instrument cluster turns on,
together with the message on the reconfigurable multifunction display.
In the event of an ASR system operating
failure, the car behaves in the same way
as a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1119m

IMPORTANT When travelling on snow
with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn
the ASR device off: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 171

145

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

EOBD SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis of thecomponents on the car correlated with emissions; it also alerts the driver, by turning on
the warning light U(on some versions together with the message + symbol on thereconfigurable multifunction display) on the
instrument panel when these components
are no longer in peak conditions.
The objective is:– to keep the system efficiency under control;– warn when a fault causes emission levels to increase over the threshold establishedby European law;
– warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.

Pagina 146

The system also has a diagnostic connector
that can be interfaced with appropriate tools,
which makes it possible to read the error codes
stored in the control unit, together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis.

If, turning the ignition key
to MAR, the warning light
U does not turn on or if,
while travelling it turns on glowing steadily or flashing (on someversions together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

146

IMPORTANT After eliminating the inconvenience, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorised Services are
obliged to run a bench test and, if necessary,road tests which may also call for a long journey.

4-07-2008

12:02

SOUND SYSTEMPRESETTING(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car, if requested without radio, is fitted with a glove compartment on the dashboard (fig. 172).
The radio system presetting consists of:

Pagina 147

If you wish to fit the radio system after purchasing the car, first it is necessary to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will be able
to advise you on how to preserve
the battery charge. The excessive
useless power asboption may damage the battery and make the battery warranty null.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Speakers
In the cars fitted with radio presetting the,sound system consists of:– No. 4 tweeters: 2 front and 2 back (onmarkets where applicable) with 30W power;– cables for sound system power supply;– No. 4 speakers with a diameter of 165
mm (2 front and 2 back) and 40W power.

– cables for front and rear loudspeaker
power supply;

AerialThe aerial is located on the car roof. You
are recommended to slacken and remove
the aerial from the roof to avoid damaging
it when washing the car in automatic system.

– cable for aerial power supply;– housing for sound system;– aerial on car roof.
The radio is to be fitted in the housing located in the glove compartment which canbe removed pressing the two retaining catches in the compartment: here it is possible tofind the power cables.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1055m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 172

147

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

SOUND SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car sound system, fitted with CD player (radio with Compact Disc player) or MP3
CD player (radio with MP3 CD player) has
been designed in accordance with the special features of the passenger compartment,with a personalised design that blends withthe style of the dashboard. The sound system cannot be adapted to other vehicles andfor this reason it cannot be removed.

Pagina 148

The radio is installed in a user-friendly position for the driver and passenger and thegraphics on the front panel make locationof the controls quick, facilitating use.
The CD Changer is available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
In the following pages you will find the
instructions for use, which you are advised
to read through carefully. The instructions also contain the procedure for controlling the
CD Changer (if provided) through the radio.
For the instructions for use of the CD Changer refer to the specific manual.

Road safety
You are advised to learn how to use thevarious radio functions (e.g.: storing stations) before starting to drive.
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
when driving. Reception may be disturbed
by the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges particularly when far away from thestation being listened to.
IMPORTANT When receiving traffic information, the volume may be higher thannormal.

Alfawiki.nl

148

ADVICE

4-07-2008

12:02

WARNING
Too high a volume when driving can put the driver’s life
at risk and that of other people.
Therefoo re the volume should always
be adjusted in such a way that it isalways possible to hear the noises
o f the surrounding environment(e.g.: horns, ambulance, policesirens, etc.).

Pagina 149

Care and maintenance

Compact DiscThe radio structure ensures long operation
with no need for particular maintenance.
In the event of a fault, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

Remember that dirt, marks or distortion on
Compact Disc can cause skipping. To obtain
optimum playing conditions we give the following advice:

To clean the front panel only use a soft,
antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing products might spoil the surface.

– Only use Compact Discs which have thefollowing brand:– Carefully clean all Compact Discs of fingerprints and dust using a soft cloth. Support Compact Discs from the outer circumference and clean from the centre outwards;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Never use chemical products for cleaning (e.g.: spray cans, antistatic or thinners)
as they might damage the surface of Compact Discs;– After use, put Compact Discs back intheir container, to avoid marks or scratches
that may cause skipping when playing;– Do not expose Compact Discs to direct
sunlight, high temperatures or damp for prolonged lengths of time to prevent them frombending;– Do not stick labels or write on the recorded surface of Compact Discs.

Alfawiki.nl

149

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

To remove a Compact Disc from its container, press the centre and raise the disccarefully, holding it by the outer circumference.
Always hold Compact Discs by the outercircumference. Never touch the surface.
To remove fingerprints and dust, use a soft
cloth starting from the centre of the Compact Disc outwards.

Pagina 150

For optimal playing use original CDs only.
Regular operation is not guaranteed if using
R/RW CDs not properly mastered and/or
CDs with max. capacity higher than 650
MB.
IMPORTANT Do not use the protective
sheets for CD in commerce or discs with stabilisers, etc. as they might get stuck in theinternal mechanism and damage the disc.

Do not use highly scratched, cracked, or
distorted discs, etc. The use of these discs
will involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.

Alfawiki.nl

150

IMPORTANT Should copy-protected CDs
be used, then, few seconds may be requiredfor playing them. Moreover, due to the proliferation of always new and different protection methods, it is not guaranteed that
the CD player can play whatever protecteddisc. Copy protection is often indicated on
the CD cover in small letters or hard to readcharacters. Usually it is indicated by writings
like: “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROTECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
PC/MAC”, or it is identified by symbols like:4-07-2008

12:02

Protected discs (and their cover) very often are not marked with the audio CD identification symbol:

Pagina 151

IMPORTANT The CD player can readmost of the compression systems currently
on sale (e.g.: LAME, BLADE, XING, FRAUNHOFER) however, due to the evolution ofthese systems, reading of all compression formats is not guaranteed.
IMPORTANT When loading a multi-session CD, only the first session will be played.

TECHNICAL DATA
Radio
Maximum power: 4 x 30W.
AerialThe aerial is located on the car roof. You
are recommended to slacken and remove
the aerial from the roof to avoid damaging
it when washing the car in automatic system.
Speakers

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

The sound system is formed of a systemcomprising:– 4 tweeters: 2 front and 2 rear (for versions/markets where applicable) with 30W
power– 4 speakers with a diameter of 165 mm(2 front and 2 rear) with 40W power.

Alfawiki.nl

151

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Protection fuse
The radio has a 10A fuse located in therear part of the set. To replace the fuse, theradio needs to be pulled out: therefore contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Pagina 152

HI-FI BOSE SYSTEM(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
The HI-FI BOSE system installed on yourcar has been accurately designed to offer
outstanding sound quality and reproduce themusical realism of a live concert, for all theseats in the passenger compartment.
The system’s features include outstanding
faithful reproduction of crystalline treble
tones and full, rich basses which among other things, make the Loudness function superfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole passenger compartment enveloping the occupants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.
The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated technology, but at the same time they are easy
and intuitive to use, so that even less expert
people can use the system.

Alfawiki.nl

152

Technical information
System comprises:– No. 4 high efficiency woofers with diameter 165 mm, two at the front and twoat the back, each having a coaxial tweeter
inside;– No. 1 bass box with a volume of 12 dm3
housed on the left-hand side of the boot;– No. 1 high power HI-FI amplifier(150W) with 6 channels, analogue equalising in amplitude signal phase and with
130 mm diameter sub-woofer.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 153

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

Audio section– Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)– Standard equalization (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)– Personal equalization (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)– Automatic volume changing according
to car speed– MUTE function

fig. 167

A0A1125m

CD / CD MP3 section– Play / Pause– Previous / next track selection– FF / FR– Previous / next directory selection

Radio section– Traffic information reception (TA)– Automatic storage of 6 stations in the
dedicated FM band - FMT (AS – Autostore)

ButtonGENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

ON

On

Short push on button

OffLong push on button

VOL+

Volume up

VOL

Volume down

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

Press button
Press button

153

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

12:02

Pagina 154

ButtonGENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

FM AS

Radio band selection FM1, FM2, FM Autostore

Brief cyclic button pressing

AM

Radio band selection MW, LW

Brief cyclic button pressing

CD

Audio source selection (radio/CD/CD-Changer)

Brief cyclic button pressing

MUTE

Volume on/off (MUTE / PAUSE)

Brief button pressing

AUD

Audio settings: bass (BASS), treble (TREBLE),
right/left sound adjustment (BALANCE),
front/rear sound adjustment (FADER)

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button ▲ or ▼Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

MENU

Advanced functions adjustment

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button ▲ or ▼Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

ButtonRADIO FUNCTIONSModeRadio station tuning:• Automatic tuning• Manual tuning

Automatic tuning: press button ÷ or ˜(long pressing for fast forward)
Manual tuning: press button ▲ or ▼(long pressing for fast forward)

Current radio station storage

Long button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

Stored station recall

Brief button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

ButtonCD FUNCTIONS

Mode

˚

CD ejection

Brief button pressing÷ ˜

Previous/next track playback

Brief pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜

CD track fast forward/backward

Long pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜▲▼Previous/next CD playback (for CD Changer)▲÷ ˜▼123456154

4-07-2008

Previous/next directory playback (for MP3 CD)

Alfawiki.nlBrief pressing on buttons ▲ or ▼Brief pressing on buttons ▲ or ▼

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 155

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS(where provided)

A0A1126m

fig. 174

ButtonFUNCTION

Modez

Audio Mute on/off(with sound system on)

Brief button pressing+

Volume up

Press button–

Volume down

Press button

SRC

Radio frequency(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and audio source(Radio - CD - MP3 - CD Changer) selection button

Press buttonôRadio: recall preset stations (1 to 6)
MP3: select next directory
CD Changer: select next CD in the CD Changer

Press buttonóRadio: recall preset stations (6 to 1)
Alfawiki.nl
MP3: select previous directory
CD Changer: select previous CD in the CD Changer

Press button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

155

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

GENERAL
The set possesses the following functions:Radio section– PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW/LW frequency bands;– RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic announcements) - TP (Program Type) EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG (Regional programmes);– AF: alternative frequency search selection in RDS mode;– emergency alarm presetting;– automatic/manual station tuning;– FM Multipath detector;– manual storage of 36 stations: 18 in
the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band and 6 in the LW
band;– automatic storage (Autostore function)of 6 stations in FM band;– SVC function (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system): automatic volume adjustment with car speed;– automatic Stereo/Mono switching.

Pagina 156

CD section– Direct disc selection;– Track selection (forward/backward);– Fast forward/backward;– CD Display function: displaying CD
name/time elapsed from start of track;– Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.

– Directory selection (previous/next);– Track selection (forward/backward);– Fast forward/backward;– MP3 DISP function: directory name, ID3tag info, time elapsed from start of track,
file name);– Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.

On multimedia CDs in addition to sound tracks also
data tracks are recorded.
Playing one of these CDs may cause
rustling and such a volume as tocompromise road safety, as well as
causing damage to the final stages
and speakers.

Audio section– Mute/Pause function;– Soft Mute function;– Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system);– 7 band graphic equalizer (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);– Separate bass/treble adjustment;– Right/left channel balancing.

Alfawiki.nl

156

CD MP3 section

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 157

FUNCTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS

Selecting CD/CD Changerfunctions

Turning the sound system on

Pressing briefly and repeatedly button CD
it is possible to select the following audio
sources in sequence:

The set is switched on pressing button ON.
When turning the sound system on, thevolume level will be brought to 20 if it was
set to over.
If the radio is turned on when the key is
not fitted into the ignition device, it will turnoff automatically after about 20 minutes.
After automatic switching off, it is however
possible to turn the radio on again for other 20 minutes by pressing button ON (seeparagraph “IGN TIME function”).
Turning the sound system off
Keep button ON pressed.
Selecting radio functions– CD (only if the Compact Disc is inserted);– CHANGER (only if the CD Changer is connected).
Audio source memory function
If while listening to a CD another function
is selected (e.g.: the radio), playing is
stopped and when the CD mode is resumed,
it starts again from the point in which it was
stopped.
If while listening to the radio another function is selected, when the Radio mode isresumed, it is tuned to the last station selected.

Volume adjustment
Adjust volume through VOL+ and VOL–
buttons.
If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin, the new setting is maintained only until the end of thebulletin.
SVC function(excluding versions with HI-FI
Bose system)
The SVC function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

See section MENU for activating/deactivating this function.

Pressing briefly and repeatedly button
FMAS it is possible to select the following
functions in sequence:– TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”);
Pressing briefly and repeatedly button AM
it is possible to select the following functions
in sequence:– TUNER (“MW”, “LW”).

Alfawiki.nl

157

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Mute /pause function(turning off the volume
completely)
To switch on the Mute function, briefly
press the button MUTE. Volume will gradually lower and the display will show the word
“MUTE” (when in radio mode) or “PAUSE”(when in CD or CD-Changer mode).
To switch off the Mute function, press the
button MUTE again. Volume will gradually
become louder returning to the value set before switching on the Mute function.
Changing volume will deactivate the Mutefunction and the volume will be set to the
new level selected.
With the Mute function on:– if an emergency alarm or a traffic bulletin arrives with the TA function on, the message ignores the Mute function. The Mutefunction will be resumed at the end of thetraffic announcement.

Pagina 158

Audio adjustments
The options proposed by the audio menu
differ according to the audio source selected: AM/FM/CD/CDC.
To change Audio functions, press briefly
button AUD. The display will show “BASS”.
To scroll the Menu options, use buttons ▲or ▼. To change the setting of the option
selected, press buttons ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are
the following:– BASS (bass adjustment);– TREBLE (treble adjustment);– BALANCE (right/left balance);– FADER (excluding versions with Bose HIFI system) (front/rear balance);– LD (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI
system) (Loudness on/off);– PRESET (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (standard equalization activation and selection);– XX USER (personal equalization setting).

Alfawiki.nl

158

Tone adjustment(bass/treble)
Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “BASS”
or “TREBLE” in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ or ˜ to increase/decrease the basses or trebles.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Balance adjustment
Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “BALANCE” in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or button ˜ toincrease the sound from the left speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both right and left speakers.

4-07-2008

12:02

Fader adjustment
Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “FADER”
in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers or button ˜ toincrease the sound from the front speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both front and rear speakers.
LD function(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, increasing the basses and trebles.
To switch the function on/off, use button▲ or ▼ to select “LD” in the AUDIO menu.
The function condition (on or off) is shownon the display for few seconds by “LD ON”
or “LD OFF”.

Pagina 159

PRESET/XX EQ SET*/CLASSIC/
ROCK/JAZZ functions(equalizer on/off)(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)*XX EQ SET function(only if the USER equalizer
setting has been selected)(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)

The integrated equalizer can be turned on
or off. With the equalizer off, it is possible
to change the sound settings only adjusting the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the function
makes it possible to adjust the sound curves.

To set a personal equalizer adjustment, usebutton ▲ or ▼ to select USER and thenpress button ▼ for long.

To turn the equalizer off, select “PRESET”
by means of button ÷ or ˜.
To turn the equalizer on, use button ÷or ˜ to select one of the following options:– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user);– “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of classic music);– “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of rock and pop music);

The display will show for about 2 seconds“XX EQ SET” and then a graph with 7 bars,
where each bar represents a frequency.
Choose the bar to be adjusted using button
÷ or ˜; the bar chosen starts to flash
and it is possible to adjust it using button ▲or ▼.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

To store the new settings, press button
AUD again or wait for about 10 seconds.
The display will show the word “MEN” together with the graph with 7 bars.
Antitheft protection
Refer to paragraph “CD Player”.

– “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of jazz music).
When one of the equalizer settings is on,
the display shows “EQ”.

Alfawiki.nl

159

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

RADIO (TUNER)
Introduction
When the set is turned on the last function
selected before turning off is played (Radio,
CD or CD Changer).
To select the Tuner source while listening
to another audio source, press briefly buttons FMAS or AM, according to the required
frequency band.
When Tuner is on, the display will show
the selected station name (RDS stations only) (or frequency), the frequency band (e.g.:FM1) and the preselection button number(e.g.: P1).

Pagina 160

Each band is shown by the respective
wording on the display.
The last station selected in the respective
frequency band will be tuned.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1,
FM2 and FMT. The FMT reception band isreserved to the stations stored automaticallywith the Autostore function.
Presetting buttons
The buttons with symbols from 1 to 6
make it possible to set the following presettings:– 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 inFM2, 6 in FMT);– 6 in the MW band;

Selecting the frequency band– 6 in the LW band;

If in the Tuner mode, briefly and repeatedly press button FMAS or AM to select therequired frequency band.

To call a preset station, choose the required
frequency band and then press briefly thecorresponding preset button (from 1 to 6).

Every time the button is pressed the following bands are selected in sequence:

Pressing the respective preset button for
longer than 2 seconds will store the tuned
station. Storing is confirmed by a beep.

– Pressing button FMAS: “FM1”, “FM2”,“FMT”;– Pressing button AM: “MW” and “LW”.

Alfawiki.nl

160

Storing the last station heard
The radio automatically keeps in storage
the last station heard for each reception
band, which is then tuned when the radio isturned on or the reception band is changed.
Automatic tuning
Briefly press button ÷ or ˜ to start
automatically searching the tuning for the
next station that it is possible to receive inthe direction chosen.
If button ÷ or ˜ is pressed for
longer, quick searching takes place. Whenthe button is released, the tuner stops on
the next receivable station.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the tuner only searches stations which broadcast traffic bulletins.

4-07-2008

12:02

Manual tuning
This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.
Select the required frequency band andthen press briefly and repeatedly button N
or O to start searching in the chosen band.
Pressing one of the buttons N or O longer
obtains fast forward searching, which is
stopped when the button is released.

Pagina 161

A-STORE function(automatic station storage)
To switch on the A-STORE function, keep
button FMAS pressed until receiving the confirmation beep. With this function the radio automatically stores the six stations withthe strongest signal in decreasing order ofintensity of the FMT frequency band.

At the end of the A-STORE function the radio automatically tunes on the first preset
station in the FMT band stored on preset button 1.
On buttons numbered from 1 to 6, the stations are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the present
band.

IMPORTANT Activating the A-STORE
function cancels the stations stored previously in the FMT band.

Activating the A-STORE function in MW or
LW bands will automatically select the FMTband where the function is then run.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
only the stations that send traffic information will be stored.

IMPORTANT Sometimes the A-STORE
function is unable to find 6 stations with astrong signal. In this case the previous stations will be stored on the free preset buttons.

During automatic storage the display
shows “A-STORE”.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

To interrupt A-STORE press button FMAS
again: the radio will automatically tune tothe station heard before activation of the AutoSTore function.

Alfawiki.nl

161

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Emergency alarm reception
In the RDS mode the radio is set to receive
emergency announcements in the case of
exceptional circumstances or events that
may cause general danger (earthquakes,
floods, etc.), if they are broadcast by thestation tuned.

Pagina 162

EON function(Enhanced Other Network)
Certain countries have circuits which group
together several stations enabled to broadcast traffic information. In this case the programme of the station being heard will beinterrupted temporarily:

This function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.

– to receive traffic information (only with
TA function on);During emergency announcement the display will show the message “ALARM”. During this announcement the volume willchange as described for traffic announcements (see paragraph “TA function”).

– to listen to regional programmes every
time these bulletins are given by one of thestations of the same circuits.
Stereophonic stations
If the signal received is weak, the device
switches automatically from Stereo to Mono.

MENU
MENU button functions
To activate the menu function, briefly press
button MENU. The display shows the word
“MENU”.
To scroll the menu functions use button ▲or ▼. To change the setting of the selected function use button ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are
the following:– AF (alternative frequency search);– TA (traffic information);– REG (regional programmes);– MP3 DISP (MP3 CD data display);– SVC (automatic volume control in relation to speed);– EXT VOL (external audio sources control);– IGN TIME (System power off mode radio);– DEFAULT (reset original settings).

Alfawiki.nl

162

To exit the menu function, press button
MENU again.

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 163

AF function(alternative frequency search)

TA function(traffic information)

Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:

Certain stations in the FM band (FM1, FM2
and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast information about traffic conditions. In this casethe display shows “TP”.

– “AF ON”: alternative frequency search on(the display shows “AF”);– “AF OFF”: alternative frequency search
off.
With “AF ON”, the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest signal that is broadcasting the same programme.
During the journey it will thus be possible tocontinue listening to the station chosen without having to change the frequency whenchanging area.
Of course, the station being listened to must
be receivable in the area the car is crossing.
To turn the AF function on/off, press button MENU, and then select “AF ON” or “AFOFF”. If the AF function has been turned on
the display shows “AF”.
If the radio is working in the AM band, whenthe AF function is activated, it passes to theFM1 band on the last station selected.

To turn the TA (traffic announcement) function on/off, briefly press button MENU andthen select “TA ON” or “TA OFF”.
IMPORTANT If the TA function (traffic information) is on, with CD, CD Changer (if installed), Telephone or Mute/Pause active:
automatic station tuning will start.
With the TA function it is possible:– to search only RDS stations that transmit in the FM band, enabled to broadcast traffic information;– to receive traffic information although CD
player or CD Changer are being used;– to receive traffic information at a predefined minimum volume even with the radio
volume off.

IMPORTANT In certain countries radio
stations exist which, even if the TP function
is on (the display shows “TP”), do not transmit traffic information.
If the radio is working in the AM band, when
TA is activated, it passes to the FM1 bandon the last station heard.
The volume with which the traffic bulletin istransmitted varies depending on the listening
volume:– listening volume below 20: traffic bulletinvolume = 20 (fixed value);– listening volume above 20: traffic bulletinvolume = listening volume +1.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

If the volume is changed during a traffic bulletin the value is not shown on the display
and the new value is kept only for the bulletin in progress.
The TA function is interrupted by pressing
any sound system button.

Alfawiki.nl

163

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 164

REG function(regional broadcast reception)

The display will show the current statusof the function:

MP3 DISP function(CD MP3 data display)

Certain national broadcasters, at determinate times of the day, transmit regional programmes which differ from region to region.
This function makes it possible to tune in only on local stations (regional) (see “EON
function”).

– “REG ON”: function on.

With this function it is possible to choose
the information shown on the display, when
listening to a MP3 CD.

Activate this function if you want to tune
automatically to regional stations broadcasting in the selected band.
To turn the function on/off use button
÷ or ˜.

– “REG OFF”: function off.
If the function is off and a regional programme is tuned that works in a determinate area and the car enters a different area,
the regional station of the new area is received.
IMPORTANT If AF and REG are both active, when passing from one region to another the radio could not tune properly toa valid alternative frequency.

This function can be selected only if a MP3
CD is loaded: in this event the display shows“MP3 DISP”.
To change the function use buttons
÷ or ˜ .

The display shows the setting among thesix possible:– TITLE (track title, if ID3-TAG available)– AUTHOR (track author, if ID3-TAG available)– ALBUM (album title, if ID3-TAG available)– DIR (directory name);– FILENAME (MP3 file name);– TIME (time elapsed from start of track).

Alfawiki.nl

164

4-07-2008

12:02

SVC function(volume changing with speed)(excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system)
This function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
To turn the function on/off use button
÷ or ˜ . The display will show the current status of the function:– SVC OFF: function off– SVC LOW: function on(low sensitivity)– SVC HIGH: function on(high sensitivity).

Pagina 165

EXT function(external audio source control)
With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 0 to 40) or exclude (OFF) external audio sources.
To turn this function on/off, use button
÷ or ˜ .

The display will show the current statusof the function:– “EXT VOL”: function on.
– “EXT OFF”: function off.
– “EXT 23”: function on with volume level 23.
IGN TIME function(system power on/off mode
radio)

IMPORTANT When the sound systemis switched off automatically after turning
the ignition key to STOP (for both immediate or 20-minute delayed power off), it willswitch on automatically turning the ignition
key to MAR. If the sound system has beenswitched off pressing button ON, when turning the key to MAR it will stay off.
RESTORE function
This function enables to restore default settings. Options available are the following:– NO: no restore;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB– YES: restore default settings. During thisoperation the display will show the message“RESTORE”. At the end of this operation,
the audio source will not be changed andthe previous situation is displayed.

This function enables to switch off thesound system according to two different
modes. To turn the function on use button
÷ or ˜ .
The display will show “IGN TIME” andthen:– “00 MIN”: deactivation dependent on
ignition key. Sound system will switch off
automatically when turning the ignition key
to STOP;– “20 MIN”: deactivation independent of
ignition key. After
having turned the ignition
Alfawiki.nl
key to STOP the sound system will stay on
for 20 minutes max.

165

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

COMPACT DISC PLAYER
Introduction
This section only describes CD player operation variants: as concerns sound system
operation, refer to paragraph “Functions andadjustments”.

Pagina 166

Selecting the compact disc player

Inserting/ejecting a CD

To turn on the Compact Disc player integrated in the set, proceed as follows:

To insert the CD set it gently in place to activate the powered loading system, which
will position it correctly.

– insert a CD with the set on: the first track
will be played;or– if a CD is already inserted, turn the set
on and press briefly button CD to select“CD”: the last heard track will be played.
For optimal playing use only original CDs.
When using R/RW CDs, use top quality CDs
mastered at the as low as possible speed.

Press button ˚, with the device on, to operate the powered CD eject system. Afterejection, the source heard before playing the
CD will return.
If CD is not ejected, the device will reload
it automatically after about 20 seconds andthen will set to Tuner (Radio).
CD cannot be ejected if the device is off.
Inserting the ejected CD without fully removing it from the slot, the tuner will notchange the source to CD.

Alfawiki.nl

166

4-07-2008

12:02

Possible error messages
If the CD inserted is illegible (e.g.: CD-ROM
inserted, CD not inserted properly or reading error), the display will show the message “CD ERROR” for about 2 seconds.
The CD is then ejected and the previous
source before CD was selected returns.
Display information
When the CD player is working, the display shows the following information whichmeans:“T05”: shows the number of the track on
the CD;“03:42”: shows the time elapsed since
the start of the track (if the corresponding
Menu function is on);

Pagina 167

Select track(forward/backward)
Briefly press button ÷ to play the previous track and button ˜ to play the next
one. Tracks are played in sequence: after thelast track, the first one will be played andvice versa.
If playing the track started more than 3
seconds ago, pressing briefly button ÷
the track is played again from the start. In
this case if wanting to play the previous
track, press the button twice consecutively.
Fast forward/backward

Pause function
To pause the CD player, press button
MUTE. The display will show “PAUSE”.
To resume playing the track, press button
MUTE again.
The pause function is deactivated changing the sound source.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Keep button ˜ pressed to move thetrack selected forward at high speed andkeep button ÷ pressed to move it quickly backward. Fast forward/backward is
stopped once the button is released.

Alfawiki.nl

167

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 168

Antitheft protection

Entering the secret code

The radio is fitted with an antitheft protection system based on the exchange of information between the radio and the electronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car.

When turning the sound system on (in theevent of code request), the display will show
the word “CDC CODE” for about 2 seconds,
followed by four dashes “- - - -”.

This system warrants the highest level of
security and prevents entry of the secretcode every time the radio supply is disconnected.
If the result of the check is positive, the set
starts working, whereas if the comparison
codes are not the same or if the electronic
control unit (Body Computer) is replaced,the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the procedure described in the following paragraph.

The secret code comprises four figures from
1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, press
the corresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.
If the four figures are not entered within
20 seconds, the display shows the word
“CDC CODE” for 2 seconds and then fours
dashes “- - - -”. This is not to be considered
as an incorrect code entry.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20
seconds), the radio starts working.
If a wrong code is entered, the radio
sounds a beep, the display shows the word
“CDC CODE” for 2 seconds and then fours
dashes “- - - -” to warn the user that it is necessary to enter the correct code.

Alfawiki.nl

168

Every time the user enters a wrong code,
the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,
2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min,1h,
2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a maximum of 24 hours. The waiting time will
be shown on the display with the word “CDC
WAIT”. When this goes off it is possible tostart the new code entry procedure.
Code Card
This the document that certifies possessionof the radio. The Code Card contains the radio model, serial number and secret code.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card carefully to be able to give the related data to
the competent authorities in the event oftheft.

4-07-2008

12:02

MP3 CD PLAYER(where provided)
Introduction
This section only describes MP3 CD player operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to paragraph “Functions
and adjustments”.
NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS andThomson multimedia.

Pagina 169

MP3 mode
In addition to standard audio CDs, thesound system can also play audio files in
MP3 format. Sound system will operate as
described in “Compact Disc player” paragraph when inserting a conventional audioCD.
For optimal playing use only top quality
CDs mastered at a speed as low as possible.
MP3 CD files are structured by directories,
with sequential lists of all directories containing MP3 tracks (directories and sub-directories are all brought to the same level), directories not containing MP3 tracks
cannot be selected.

Technical data and operating conditions forMP3 files are as follows:– adopted CD-ROM shall be mastered according to ISO9660 Standard;– music files shall be renamed as “.mp3”
otherwise they cannot be played;– sampling frequencies are: 44.1 kHz,
stereo (96 to 320 kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz,mono or stereo (32 to 80 kbit/s);– it is possible to play variable bit-rate
tracks (files).
IMPORTANT Characters: blank, ‘ (apostrophe), ( and ) (open and closed brackets)
are not admitted in MP3 track names. Whensampling MP3 CD you must not use thesecharacters to name files otherwise the soundsystem will not be able to play it.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

169

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 170

DISPLAY INFORMATION

Select next/previous directory

Antitheft protection

ID3-tag info display(track informations)

Press button N to select the next directoryor press button O to select the previous one.
The name of the new selected directory will
be shown on the display.

Refer to paragraph “Compact Disc player”.

In addition to time elapsed, directory nameand file name, also ID3-tag info relevant totrack Title, Artist, Author (see “MP3 dispfunction”) are displayed.
The MP3 directory name shown on the display corresponds to the name with which
the directory is stored on the CD, followedby an asterisk.
Example of full MP3 directory name: BESTOF *.

Directories are selected in cyclic sequence:
after the last directory the first one is selected and vice versa.
If no other directory/track is selected in
the following 2 seconds, the first track in the
new directory will be played.
If the last track in the currently selected directory is played, the next will then be
played.

If you want to display one ID3-tag info (Title, Artist, Album) and the track being played
has no ID3-tag info then, the file name will
be displayed.

Alfawiki.nl

170

4-07-2008

12:02

CD CHANGER (CDC)
Installation and connectionof a Lineaccessori CD
Changer shall only be
performed by Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

Introduction
This section only describes CD Changer(where provided) operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to paragraph “Functions and adjustments”.
Selecting the CD changer
Turn on the set, then press briefly and repeatedly button CD until selecting “CHANGER”.

Pagina 171

Possible error messages

Selecting the CD

Error messages will be displayed in the following cases:

Press button N to select the next CD andbutton O to select the previous CD. If theloader does not contain a disc in the position selected, the display briefly shows thewording “CD ERROR”, and the next CD is
played automatically.

– no CD in the CD Changer: the display
will show “CD ERROR” until changing thesound source;– selected CD is illegible (CD not in the selected position or CD not inserted properly):
the display shows “CD ERROR” after thenumber of the selected CD. The next CD will
be selected; if there are no other CDs or ifthey are also illegible the display will show
the wording “NO CD” until the sound sourceis changed;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB– error in CD reading: the display shows“CD ERROR”. The next CD will be selected;
if there are no other CDs in the CD Changer (after the last CD search will restart fromthe first one) or they are also illegible, if thesound source is not changed, the display willshow the following:❒ “CD Changer” for about 2.5 seconds;❒ “CD Error” for about 5 seconds;❒ plays next source for other 5 seconds;– a CD-ROM is inserted: next CD will beselected.

Alfawiki.nl

171

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 172

TROUBLESHOOTING

Compact disc player

MP3 file reading

Overview

CD not played
Loaded CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
Loaded CD is scratched. Try to play anotherCD.

Skipping when reading MP3 files

Low volume
The Fader function shall only be set to “F”(front), to prevent sound system output
power reduction and volume muting if theFader level set is = R+9.
Required source cannot be
selected
No CD loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD
you want to play.

Required CD cannot be loaded
Another CD is already loaded. Press button
˚ and remove the CD.

Alfawiki.nl

172

Loaded CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the
CD as described in paragraph “CD” in “Advice” paragraph.

MP3 track length not displayedcorrectly
In certain cases (due to recording) MP3
track length can be displayed incorrectly.

4-07-2008

12:02

MOBILE TELEPHONEPROVISION

Pagina 173

The voice kit should bepurchased by the customer
as it must be compatible
with the customer’s phone.

The car may be fitted with a provision for
installing a cell phone.
The mobile phone provision consists of:– radio + cell phone dual-purpose antenna;– connection and supply cables with specific connector for connecting hands-free kit.

For the installation of acell phone and connection
to the provision in the car,
contact only Alfa Romeo Authorised Services; this will guarantee
first-rate results with no possibility of any inconvenience that may
compromise the safety of the car.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft, etc.)
or accessories that in any case burden theelectric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, whose qualified personnel,
besides suggesting the most suitable devices
belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will
also evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the car electric system isable to withstand the load required, orwhether it needs to be integrated with amore powerful battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

173

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

INSTALLATION OF
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
DEVICESElectric/electronic devices installed after
buying the car or in aftermarket shall bear
the and marking:

Pagina 174

IMPORTANT Installation of devices resulting in modifications of car characteristics
may cause driving license seizing by traffic
agents and also the lapse of the warranty
as concerns defects due to the abovementioned modification or traceable back to it
directly or indirectly.

RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLULARTELEPHONES

Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility
for damages caused by the installation of
non-genuine accessories or not recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and installed
not in compliance with the specified requirements.

Mobile phones and other radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: HAM radio systems andthe like) shall not be used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installationof transceivers provided that installation iscarried out at a specialized shop, workmanlike performed and in compliance with
manufacturer's specifications.

IMPORTANT The use of mobile phones,
HAM radio systems or other similar devices
inside the passenger compartment (without
separate aerial) may cause electronic systems equipping the car to malfunction. This
could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for the passengers.
In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body.
As concerns the use of mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) withhomologation, keep strictly to the mobile phone manufacturer's specifications.

Alfawiki.nl

174

4-07-2008

12:02

HANDSFREE SYSTEM
WITH VOICECOMMANDS AND
Bluetooth®
TECHNOLOGY
GENERAL
The Bluetooth® technology allows dialogue without electrical connections (wireless) between your cellular telephone andthe handsfree system in the car.
Communication is based on the transmission of short-radius radio waves which exchanges data and voice at a speed of about
1 Mb (Megabyte) per second in a range of
10 metres.

Pagina 175

The system installed on the car includes thefollowing functions:– radio sound cut off during telephone calls– handsfree conversation– transmission of conversation through the
car speakers, with optimal sound quality– possibility of connecting up to three cellular telephones with the activation of one cellular at a time (the setting of the connection
priority will be described later)– voice recognition (according to the typeof cellular phone)– automatic storing of telephone numbersin the directory– storing of more telephone numbers foreach single contact (e.g. home, work, cellular depending on the type of cellular phone)– forwarding/accepting/rejecting calls withvoice command (depending on the type ofcellular phone)– volume control with the cellular telephonemenu and the radio volume control buttons(see the Radio paragraph)– “confidential” conversation mode, totransfer the sound from the handsfree system
directly to the cellular phone (depending on
the type of cellular phone)– reduction of echo and background noise.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

The radio frequency used by the Bluetooth® technology is not subject to any restrictions and is completely free.
The handsfree system with voice commands makes it possible to make telephone
calls safely, freely and comfortably in any
driving situation, receiving and making telephone calls without taking the hands off thesteering wheel, as prescribed by the law.

Alfawiki.nl

175

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Pagina 176– microphone

The button control panel (fig. 175) is on
the central console and has two buttons, one
green (A) and one red (B), which makeit possible to activate all the functions of thesystem.

– button control panel

Press the green button (A) to:

The electronic control unit is housed in thedashboard, and contains the transmitter with
the Bluetooth® technology, the microprocessor for the signals and the software.

– activate the voice recognition

The microphone located in the front panel is a high-quality component, designed toensure the optimum communication in every
condition.

– turn on the “confidential” mode.

The main components of the system are:– electronic control unti

– accept the call or double call– dial the last number called
Press the red button (B) to:– end a call
– refuse a call.

A0A1036m

Alfawiki.nl

176

fig. 175

Pressing simultaenously the green(A) and red (B) buttons for at least
2 seconds clears the memory.
IMPORTANT Clearing the memory implies the disconnection of all the telephones
memorised, the clearing of all the numbers
stored in the memory of the handsfree system and then calls for a new connection procedure to use the system again.

4-07-2008

12:02

COMPATIBLE CELLULARTELEPHONES
The cellular phones compatible with thesystem are shown in the following table:
Brand

Model

BLACKBERRYERICSSONMOTOROLA

7100, 7290
R520, T39m, T68m
V3, V500, V501, V525, V547, V551,
V555, V600, V635, V80, E398,
E1000, MPX 220, E680, A779, A780,
SLVR L7 o V8, KRZR K1, RAZR2 V8,
RIZR Z3, RIZR Z8
NOKIA
3110, 3650, 3660, 6131, 6230,
6230i, 6233, 6234, 6260, 6288,
6300, 6310, 6310i, 6600, 6650,
6670, 6680, 6230, 6810, 6820,
6630, 7280, 7600, 7610, 8800,
8910, 8910i, 9300, N-Gage,
N-Gage QD, N73, N90, X5700
PANASONICX700
XDA2
SPV M1000, XDA2
PHILIPS
Fisio 820, Fisio 825
SAMSUNG
SGH-D500, SGH-E730, SGH-E640,
SGH-E370, SGH-E950, SGH-U700
SHARP
GX15, GZ 15, GZ-100, GX30,
GX31, GX32, TM200
SIEMENS
S55, S56, S65, S66, SL75, SK65, SX1
PDA/SMARTPHONES SPV E200, SPV C500, M1000
SONY ERICSSON
T68i, P800, P900, P910i, T606,
T610, Z600, Z608, V800, K750i,
K800i, T630, T650i, W850i, W880i
TELITAL
NeoFone

SPV
QTEK

E200, C500
8020, S100

Pagina 177

SYSTEM ACTIVATION
To activate the system after the first connection, turn the ignition key to MAR. Whenthe system is active, the two leds on the buttons light on. To connect your cellular telephone to the system after the first connection
it is necessary to get inside car with the cellular phone on and the Bluetooth® function
activated.

FIRST CONNECTION
OF THE CELLULAR TELEPHONE
TO THE SYSTEM
To carry out the first connection between
the cellular telephone and the handsfree system it is necessary to activate the Bluetooth® function on your phone, following therelated instructions (see your cellular telephone user’s handbook). When the function
is on, the related icon is displayed.
When connecting for the first time to thesystem, you will hear the instruction “Please,pair device”. Now connect the cellular phone
to the system (see your cellular telephoneuser’s handbook.
IMPORTANT If wanting to use theBluetooth® handsfree system, it is possible
to avoid repeating the message ““Please, pairdevice” setting the minimum value of theradio PHONE function (see Radio paragraph).
To hear the message “Please, pair device”
it is necessary to turn the radio on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

177

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

During the connection procedure,
the cellular telephone display willshow a message to enter the connection code; enter code “1234”
and then confirm.
Afterwards the connection will be carried out
automatically, provided that the two sets areat very close distance. A beep will communicate that the connection has been established.
Below are some examples of the operations
to make for the first connection on some of
the most known cellular telephones.
IMPORTANT The system works only
when the ignition key is turned to MAR. The
connecting procedure must be carried out only the first time the cellular phone is matchedto the system. If at the first connection, thehandsfree system does not say “Please, pairdevice”, reset the system pressing (A) and(B) simultaneously for at least 2 seconds.

Pagina 178

CONNECTION OF OTHERTELEPHONES
To connect another cellular phone, repeat
the procedure carried out for the first connection, up to a maximum of 3 cellular
phones. For the connection of other cellular
phones it will be necessary to clear the system (see following paragraph).
CLEARING THE SYSTEM
To clear the system memory press the green(A) and red (B) buttons for at least 2 seconds.
IMPORTANT Clearing the memory implies the disconnection of all the telephones
memorised, the clearing of all the numbers
stored in the memory of the handsfree system and then calls for a new connection procedure to use the system again.

Alfawiki.nl

178

CONNECTION PRIORITY
If at least 2 cellular phones have been connected, the first one to be connected (in time)
will be that with the highest priority. It meansthat when getting inside the car, with the system active (ignition key at MAR), it willbe the first one to be searched and, if present,connected. If it is not found, the system will
search for the other cellular phones.
MANAGING TELEPHONE CALLS
Below are the general procedures for managing telephone calls, generally applied to all
cellular telephones.
To make a telephone callmanually– Dial the required number on the cellular
telephone keyboard– press enter on the phone to start the telephone call– the telephone call will be automaticallyswitched over to the handsfree mode (onsome cellular telephone models it is necessary to press the green button (A) toswitchover to the handsfree mode).

4-07-2008

12:02

To make a telephone call withthe voice commands (after
matching voice samples to thenumbers in the phone directory)– press the green button (A)– wait for the beep and/or the word
“PHONE” to be shown on the radio display– pronounce the name of the person
you wish to call– the system will repeat the pronounced
name to confirm it and then make thetelephone call
– if the name pronounced by the systemfor confirmation is different from the wishedone, press the red button (B) and repeat
the procedure.

Pagina 179

The telephone call made with the voicecommands is possible only for the namesin the directory matched to a voice sample.
The handsfree system can recognise all
the voice samples recorded on the cellular
phone, thus making it possible to call withthe voice command all the numbers
matched to the voice samples.
Anyway, it is possible to memorise (depending on the type of cellular telephone) the voicesamples directly in the handsfree system directory, but, in this case, the handsfree system
will recognise only these voice samples.
IMPORTANT To be recognised by thesystem the voice commands must be pronounced keeping a natural tone, articulating the words well and clearly.

For an optimal result, it is suggested toassociate the voice samples in the following conditions:– with doors and windows closed– with ventilation and engine off (ignition key at MAR)– from the driver’s seat– preferably using long names (forexample: “Mario Rossi” instead of“Mario”); the system records a voice sample for max 2 seconds.
IMPORTANT Before using the voicecommands make sure that on the cellular
phone the following functions are on:Bluetooth®, “Voice commands” and“Wordspotting” (according to the type ofcellular phone). The performance of thevoice recognition are variable and dependon the model of the cellular phone used.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

179

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-200812:02

To accept a telephone call
Press the green button (A).
To reject a telephone call
Press the red button (B).
To end a call
Press the red button (B).
To dial the last number called
Press and keep the green button (A)pressed until the number is dialled.

Pagina 180

To manage a second telephone
call (depending on the type of cellular phone)

IMPORTANT The system can manage
the second call only if the ”Call notice”
function is active on the cellular phone.

– To refuse the second oncoming callpress the red button (B).
– To communicate with the new callerpress the green button (A) once.
– To go back to the first telephone callpress the green button (A) again.
– To end communication, press the red
button (B) once.

For additional information about theassociation between vocal samples andnumbers in the address book, calls bymeans of keywords, and other settings,
refer to the cell phone manual.

Alfawiki.nl

180

4-07-2008

12:02

Pagina 181

PROBLEM SOLVING
PROBLEMSOLUTION

The system is not operative
The system signals
a connection problem with the Bluetooth®
The telephone does not detect the handsfree system

Make sure that the ignition key is turned to MAR
Turn off the cellular phone and then on again (if the handsfree system does not respond to commands)

The cellular telephone is not detected
The interlocutor complains about the bad audio quality
during communication
The interlocutor complains about the echo
during communication
The interlocutor’s voice cannot be heard
After entering the code “1234”
no connection can be establishedThe cellular telephone is detected too much slowly
by the system
When trying to make a telephone callwith the voice command, the system says thatthe name is not recorded
The system does not make it possible to manage the double call
Some numbers in the telephone directory
are not copied in the system memory
The system does not recognise the voice commands

Turn off the cellular phone and then on again
Check that the Bluetooth® function of the cellular phone is on(if necessary, see the instructions of your cellular phone)
Repeat the connection phase
Speak clearly towards the microphone
Lower the cellular telephone volume. If necessary, lower also the volume of the radio PHONE
function (see Radio paragraph)
Adjust the cellulat telephone volume and, if needed, check the volume of the radio PHONE
function (see Radio paragraph)
Return to the main menu and repeat the connection phase

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Set the user’s priority (see the “Connection priority” paragraph)
Check that the name has been associated to a voice sample
Repeat the name clearly in the microphone direction
Check that the “Call notice” function has been activated on the cellular telephone
Check that these numbers are present in the cellular telephone directory and not only in the memory of
the SIM card
Check that the Bluetooth®, “Voice commands” and “Wordspotting” functions have been activatedon the cellular phone

IMPORTANT For the checks, service or possible repairing of the system, contact only Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

181

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

REFUELLINGPETROL ENGINESThe antipollution deviceson the car oblige the use of
only four-star unleaded
petrol with octane number (R.O.N.)of 95 or over.

Pagina 182

To prevent accidentally filling with leaded
petrol, the diameter of the fuel tank filler
is of such a size as not to accept the nozzle of this type of petrol

An inneficient catalyst
leads to harmful emission
at the exhaust, thus environment pollution.

JTD ENGINES
Never use leaded petrol,as this would irreversibly
damage the exhaust gas
catalyst. If leaded fuel is added to
the fuel tank, no matter how small
the quantity, DO NOT START THE
ENGINE. Do not attempt to dilutethe fuel in the tank, completely
drain the fuel circuit and tank.

The car must only be filledwith fuel oil for motor vehicles, in compliance with
European Specification EN590. The
use of other products or mixtures
may irreparably damage the engine
with invalidatoion of the warranty due to the damage caused. In
the event of accidentally fillingwith another type of fuel, do notstart the engine and empty thetank. If the engine has been run
even for only a very short time, in
addition to the tank, it is also necessary to empty the whole supply
circuit.

Alfawiki.nl

182

If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation of paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel filter.
In order to avoid these problems, different
types of diesel are distributed according to
the season: summer type, winter type arctic type (mountains/cold areas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable forthe current temperature, mix diesel fuel with
TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions stated on the can, putting first theantifreeze in the tank and then the diesel
fuel.
TUTELA DIESEL ART shall be added todiesel fuel before the due to cold take place.
Adding it later will be worthless. If driving or
parking the vehicle for a long period in cold
areas/mountains, refuel with the diesel fuel available at local filling stations. In thissituation you are also recommended to havein the tank an amount of fuel 50% higher
than usable capacity.

4-07-2008

12:02

FUEL CAP (fig. 176)
The fuel cap (A) is key-lockable and has acatch to prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens it to the flap (C); to gain access to it,
open the flap then use the ignition key to turncounter-clocwise and remove the cap.
When refuelling, hook the cap to the device
on the inner flap, as illustrated.

Pagina 183

IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank
may cause light pressurising. A little breathing off, while slackening the cap, is absolutely normal.
After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise until one or more clicks are heard; then turnthe key clockwise to lock. Close the flap.

WARNING
Do not go near the fuelfiller with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire. Avoid
going too near the fuel filler withyour face, to avoid inhaling harmful vapours.

IMPORTANT For your safety, before
starting the engine, also make sure that thefuel nozzle is correctly inserted in the fueldistributor.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

In the case of need, only
replace the cap with another genuine one, or theefficiency of the fuel vapour recovery system could be adversely
affected.

A0A0146m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 176

183

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:02

ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
The devices used to reduce petrol engine
emissions are:– Trivalent catalytic converter (catalytic silencer);

Pagina 184

The emission reducing devices are:– Oxidising catalyst;– Exhaust gas re-circulation system(E.G.R.);– Particulate filter (DPF) (only for versions/markets where applicable).

– Lambda sensors;– Anti-evaporation system.
Do not run the engine, even for a test, with
one or more glow plugs disconnected.

Alfawiki.nl

184

WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached during operation of the catalytic silencer andthe particull ate filter (DPF) (only forversions/markets where applicable) the car should not be parked
over inn flammable materials (grass,
dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): danger of fire.

4-07-2008

12:02

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)(only for versions/markets where applicable)
It is a mechanical filter, fitted in the exhaust system, which traps the carbon particles present in the exhaust gases of diesel
engines.
The filter function is to eliminate almost
completely the emissions of carbon particles,in accordance with the current/future regulations.
During normal use of the car, the engine
control unit records a series of data concerning the use (time, type of road, temperature reached, etc.) and calculates thequantity of particulate in the filter.

Pagina 185

As this filter is an accumulating system
which must be regenerated (cleaned) burning the carbon particles, the regeneration
procedure is managed automatically by theengine control unit according to the filter conditions and the car using conditions. During
the filter regeneration the following phenomena may occur: raising of idling, activation of electric fan, limited growth ofsmoke level, high temperature at the exhaust.
These situations must no be considered as
faults and do not affect the car performanceand the environment.

Particulate filter clogged
When the particulate filter is clogged, theinstrument cluster h warning light(on some versions the symbol h isdisplayed) turns on. In this case you areadvised to keep the car travelling until theh warning light goes off (or the symbol h on the display goes off).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

110-185_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

185

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

Pagina 186

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
STARTING
THE ENGINEIMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the engine
fails to start, see the “Alfa Romeo CODE
system”.

We recommend that during the initial period you do
not drive to full car performance (for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at top
speed, hard braking, etc.).

ATTENZIONE
Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engine consumes
oxygen and produces carbon
monoxide which is a highly toxic
and lethal gas.

The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return the
key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine does
not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.

Alfawiki.nl

186

When the engine isswitched off never leave
the ignition key in the
MAR position to prevent pointlesscurrent absoption from draining thebattery.

4-07-2008

12:03

Pagina 187

STARTING PROCEDURE
FOR JTD VERSIONSSTARTING PROCEDURE
FOR PETROL VERSIONSIMPORTANT It is important never topress the accelerator before the engine
has started.

1) Make sure the handbrake isengaged.

1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal, so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thegears.
4) Ensure that the electric systems anddevices, especially if they absorb highquantities of energy (e.g. heatedrearscreen), are switched off.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV position and release it as soon as the engine
starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return
the key to STOP, then repeat the procedure.

2) Set the gearshift lever to neutral.
3) Turn the ignition key to MAR. The reconfigurable multifunction display will show
the m warning light.
4) Wait for the m to turn off, whichtakes place sooner, the warmer theengine. With the engine very warm thelight might stay on for such a short time
as to pass unnoticed.

IMPORTANT The electric devices thatabsorb a high amount of energy (climate control, rearscreen heating, etc.) are
cut off automatically during starting.
If the engine does not start at the firstattempt, move the ignition key to STOP
before repeating starting.
If starting is difficult (with the Alfa
Romeo CODE system working properly),
do not insist with prolonged attempts.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the cause
is due to low battery charge. Never use abattery charger to start the engine.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

5) Fully depress the clutch pedal.
6) Turn the ignition key to AVV assoon as the m warning light has goneout. Waiting too long, makes the warming
work of the glow plugs useless.

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start
the engine do not insist with extended
attempts which may damage the catalyst,
but contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

Alfawiki.nl

187

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

WARMING THE ENGINE– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without accelerating abruptly.
– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometres of the journey. Wait until the engine coolant temperature reaches
50-60 °C.
SWITCHING OFF

Pagina 188

For cars with turbocharger in particular, but for allcars in general, sharp accelerating should be avoided before switching the engine off. A“kick” on the accelerator serves
no purpose, consumes fuel pointlessly and may cause serious damage to the turbocharger impeller
bearings.

– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP
position and switch off the engine.
IMPORTANT After a tiring journey it isadvisable to let the engine “get its breathback” allowing it to idle a while to lower thetemperature in the engine compartment.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe car on the move, the next time it is started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light may
turn on (Y). In this case, check that switching off and starting the engine again withthe car stationary, the warning light stays
off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

Alfawiki.nl

188

EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (warning light Y on the instrument cluster glowing on steadily) emergency starting may be carried out using thecode of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.
Never bump, tow, or
coast start the car as thiswould cause fuel to flow
into the catalyst causing irreversible damage.

WARNING
Remember that the servobrake and power steering are not operational until theengine has been started, therefore much more effort than usual
is required on the brake pedal andsteering wheel.

4-07-2008

12:03

PARKING

Pagina 189

FUEL ECONOMYElectric services– Engage the handbrake.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS– Engage first gear if the car is faced uphill or reverse if the car is facing downhill.

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rearscreen heating, additional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the requirement of current fuel consumption (up to+25% in the urban cycle).

Car maintenance

Climate control system– Turn the front wheels so that the carwill immediately come to a halt if thehandbrake slips.

To take care of the car maintenancehave the checks and adjustments carriedout in accordance with the “Scheduled
Maintenance Programme”.

When the engine isswitched off never leave
the ignition key in the
MAR position to prevent pointless current absorption fromdraining the battery.

Tyres

The climate control system is a further
load bearing heavily on the engine inducing higher consumption levels(up to+20% on average). Outside temperature
permitting, preferably use the air vents.

When the car is parked, proceed as follows:– Switch off the engine.

By following a few simple guidelines, it
is possible to save car running costs and reduce harmful emissions.

Check the pressure of the tyres routinely
at an interval of no more than 4 weeks: if
the pressure is too low consumption levels
increase as resistance to rolling is higher.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Aerodynamic items
The use of non-certified aerodynamic
items may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.

Useless loads

WARNING
Never leave children
unattended in the car.
Always remove the ignition key
when leaving the car and take itwith you.

Never travel with an overload in theboot. The weight of the car (especially inurban traffic), and its geometry heavily
affect consumption levels and stability.

Alfawiki.nl

189

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

Pagina 190

DRIVING STYLE

Gearshifting

CONDITIONS OF USE

Starting

As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear.

Cold starting

Do not warm the engine with the car at astandstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms up much
more slowly, increasing electrical consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable
to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding
high speeds. This way the engine will warm
faster.
Pointless manoeuvres
Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic
lights or before switching off the engine. Thisand also double declutching is absolutely
pointless on modern cars and also increase
consumption and pollution.

Using a low gear to obtain brilliant performance increases consumption.
In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions andengine wear.
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases
with speed. Maintain an even as possible
speed, avoiding superfluous braking andaccelerating, which cost in terms of both
fuel and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating heavily taking the engine toa high speed has a considerably adverse
effect on consumption and emission levels; it is wise to accelerate gradually and notexceed the maximum torque.

Alfawiki.nl

190

Short journeys and frequent cold starts
do not allow the engine to reach optimum
operating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumption levels(from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)
and emission of harmful substances.
Traffic situations and roadconditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied
to situations with heavy traffic, for example in queues with frequent use of thelower gears or in cities with many traffic
lights. Also winding mounting roads andrough road surfaces adversely affect consumption.
Stopping in the traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) it is advisable to switch the engine
off.

4-07-2008

12:03

Pagina 191

COMFORT
SUSPENSIONSWINTER TYRES(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

Use winter tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided on the car.

The car can be fitted with a particular
type of suspension trim, able to increase
the comfort during travelling.

Alfa Romeo Authorised Services will bepleased to advise you on the choice of thetyre most suited to the use the Customer
intends to make of it.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and specifications of winter tyres,follow the instructions given in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.

IMPORTANT When winter tyres areused with a maximum speed index below
the one that can be reached by the car(increased by 5%), place a notice in thepassenger’s compartment, plainly in the driver’s view, which states the maximum permissible speed of the winter tyres (as per
CE Directive).
Fit the same type of tyre on all four wheels(brand and profile) to ensure higher driving
safety when braking and good handling.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

The winter features of these tyres are
reduced considerably when the tread
depths is below 4 mm. In this case theyshould be replaced.
Due to the winter features, under normal
conditions of use or long motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres islower than that of normal tyres.
It is necessary therefore to limit their use
to the purposes for which they are certified.

Alfawiki.nl

191

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.
Use snow chains with reduced size withmaximum protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Snow chains may not be
used on tyres type 205/
55 R16” 91V - 205/55
R16” 91W or 215/45 R17” 87W
due to interference with the front
suspension strut.

Snow chains should only be applied to thedrive wheels (front).

Pagina 192

With snow chains fitted it
is advisable to turn off
the ASR system. Press
the ASR-OFF button, led on button on.
Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the compact
spare wheel. So, if a front(drive) wheel is punctured andchains are needed, a rear wheel
should be fitted to the front of
the car (inflate the tyres to thespecified pressure as soon as
possible) and the spare wheel
should be fitted to the rear. Thisway, with two normal drive
wheels, snow chains can be fitted
to them to solve an emergency.

Before purchasing or using snow chains,
you are recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
Check the tensions of the chain after the
first few metres have been driven.

Alfawiki.nl

192

Keep your speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements toprevent damaging the tyres, suspension and steering.

4-07-2008

12:03

CAR INACTIVITY
If the car is to be left inactive for long
periods, the following precautions should
be noted:– house the car under acover in a dry
and possibly ventilated place;– engage a gear;– check that the handbrake is notengaged;– disconnect the battery negative terminal from the battery and check the battery
charge. This check should be repeatedevery three months during stowage.
Charge the battery if the indicator shows(where provided) a dark colour in the central green area;– clean and protect the paintwork byprotective wax;

Pagina 193– cover the rubber windscreen andrearscreen wiper blades with talcum powder and raise them off the glass;

TOWING TRAILERS– open the windows slightly;

WARNINGS– cover the car with a fabric or perforated plastic cover. Do not use compact plastic covers which prevent the humidity on
the surface on the car from evaporating;

For towing caravans or trailers the car
must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system.
Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who release a special
document for circulation on the road.

– inflate the tyres to a pressure of +0.5
bars above normal and check it periodically;– if the battery is not disconnected fromthe electric system, check its charge every
thirty days and if the indicator shows adark colour in the green area, charge thebattery;

Install any specific and/or additional
rearview mirrors as specified by law.
Remember that when towing a trailer,
steep hills are harder to climb, the braking
spaces increase and overtaking takes
longer depending on the overall weight.

– do not empty the engine cooling system.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using the brake.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

The weight the trailer exerts on the car
tow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual car loading capacity.

– clean and protect the metal polishedparts with marketed products;

Alfawiki.nl

193

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

To make sure the maximum towableweight is not exceeded (given in the logbook) account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories and personal belongings.
Drive within the specific speed limit inevery country for car trailers. In any case themaximum speed should never exceed 100
km/h.

Pagina 194

WARNING
The ABS system withwhich the car may be fitted
does not control the trailer braking
system. Particular care is therefore
necessary on slippery surfaces.

WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the car brake system be altered to control the
trailer brake. The trailer braking
system must be fully independentof the car’s hydraulic system.

INSTALLINGTHE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel according to the following instructions and any
additional and/or integrative information
supplied by the Manufacturer of the device
itself.
The towing device must meet current
regulations with reference to Directive
94/20/CEE and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the caron which it is to be installed.
For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally
placed on a special bracket normally fastened to the towing device itself.
For the electric connection a 7 or 13
pole 12VDC connection must be used
(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards) following any reference instructions given by
the car Manufacturer and/or towing device
Manufacturer.

Alfawiki.nl

194

4-07-2008

12:03

Any electric brake should be supplied directly by the battery through a cable witha cross-section of no less than 2.5 mm2.
In addition to the electrical branches, the car
electric system can only be connected to the
supply cable for an electric brake and to thecable for an internal light, though not above
15W.

Pagina 195

INSTALLATION LAYOUT(fig. 2)The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø
using 8 M10 screws and 4 M12 screws.
The counter-plates (1), (2) should havea minimum thickness of 6 mm.
The counter-plates (3), (4) should havea minimum thickness of 5 mm.
The fastening points (5) should be fittedwith Ø 20 x 4.5 mm spacers.

The hook should be fastened to the body
avoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumps that remains visible when
the hook is removed.
IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten
a label (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:
MAX LOAD ON BALL 60 kg.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

195186-196_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:03

Pagina 196

SEZ. A-A

fully laden

Rear wheel axis

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

A0A0339m

Centering hole

Regulation ballCentering hole

Alfawiki.nl

196

fig. 2

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 197

IN AN EMERGENCY
In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet.
You can also consult www.alfaromeo.com to find Alfa Romeo Authorised Services your nearest

EMERGENCY
STARTING

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The U warning light will
come on for eight seconds and then go off,
now release the accelerator pedal.

If it is not possible to deactivate the engine
inhibitor with the Alfa Romeo CODE system,
the Y and U warning lights stay on andthe engine will not start. Emergency starting is needed to start the engine.

4) The U warning light begins to flash:after it has flashed the same number oftimes as the first digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep it
pressed until the U warning light turns on(for four seconds) and then goes off; now
release the accelerator pedal.

IMPORTANT You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out.
If a mistake is made during the emergency
procedure, the ignition key should be turned
to STOP and the operations must be repeated from the start (point 1).
1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on the
CODE card.
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

5) The U warning light starts to flash: after the number of flashes corresponding to
the second digit on the CODE card, press theaccelerator pedal and keep it pressed.

8) A quick flash of the U warning light(for about four seconds) confirms that theoperation has been carried out correctly.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

9) Start the engine turning the ignition key
from MAR to AVV without returning the
key to the STOP position.
Conversely, if the U warning light stays
on, turn the key to STOP and repeat theprocedure starting from point 1).
IMPORTANT After emergency starting
it is advisable to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, because the emergency
procedure must be repeated each time theengine is started.

6) Repeat this procedure for the remaining digits on the CODE card.
7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The U warning
light turns on (for four seconds) and thengoes off; now release the accelerator pedal.

Alfawiki.nl

197

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 198

STARTING WITH AN AUXILIARYBATTERY
If the battery is flat (for battery with
optical hydrometer: dark colour without
green area in the centre), it is possible tostart the engine using an auxiliary battery
with the same capacity or a little higher than
the flat one.
Proceed as follows (fig. 1):
1) Remove the protective cover on thepositive battery post pressing on the opening catches (front), then connect the positive terminals (+ sign next to the terminal) of the two batteries using a special
cable.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect
the negative terminals of the two batteries: any sparks may ignite the detonating
gas which could come out of the battery.
If the auxiliary battery is installed onanother car, avoid metal parts touching
accidentally between this car and the one
with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine has started, remove
the cables, reversing the sequence followed
for connection.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contat the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

Never use a battery charger to start the engine as
this could damage the electronic systems of your car, particularly the ignition and fuel supply
control units.

2) Connect the end of the second jumplead to the negative terminal (–) of theauxiliary battery with an earth point E on
the engine or gearbox of the car to be
started.
A0A0149m

Alfawiki.nl

198 fig. 1

WARNING
This starting proceduremust be carried out by
qualified personnel because incorrect operations may cause electrical discharge of considerable
intensity. The liquid contained in
the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with theskin and eyes. Keep naked flames
and lighted cigarettes away fromthe battery and do not cause
sparks.

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 199

STARTING BY INERTIA

IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

Never push, tow or coast
start the car. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly

IMPORTANT If the car is equippedwith “Kit for tyre quick repair Fix&Go“,
see the instructions contained in the following chapter.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and compact spare wheel (for versions/markets where applicable) call forsome precautions as listed below.

WARNING
Remember that the engine
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
is started, therefore, much greater
effort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING
Signal the presence of thestationary car according
to current regulations: hazard
warning lights, reflecting triangleetc..
Any passengers should leave the
car and wait for the wheel to bechanged out of harm of the traffic.
If parked on a slope or rough surface, chock the wheels withwedges or other suitable devices
to prevent the car from rolling.

WARNING
Never start the engine
with the car jacked. Whendriving with a trailer, disconnect
the trailer before raising the car.
The compact spare wheel is specific to your car, do not use it onother models, or use the spare
wheel of other models on yourcars.
Should the type of wheels used
be changed (alloy rims instead ofsteel), it is also necessary tochange the whole set of fastening
bolts with others of suitable size.
The compact spare wheel is narrower than normal wheels, it
should be used only for the distance necessary to reach a service point to have the punctured
tyre repaired and during its use,the car speed must not exceed 80
km/h.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Alfawiki.nl

199

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 200

WARNING
The spare wheel has a
sticker that summarises
the main cautions for use and limitations. Ths sticker should neverbe removed or covered. Th sticker contains the following in four
languages:
CAUTION! FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY! MAX 80 km/h! REPLACEBY NORMAL WHEEL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. DO NOT COVER THISLABEL IN USE.
Never fit a wheel cap on a compact
spare wheel.
The car will handle differently withthe spare wheel fitted: avoid
heavy braking and accelerating,sharp corners and a bends.

WARNINGThe life of the spare wheel
is approx. 3000 km, after
this distance it should be replacedwith another of the same type.
Never attempt to fit a conventional tyre on a rim designed for use as
a compact spare wheel. Have thepunctured wheel repaired and refitted as soon as possible. Two or
more compact spare wheels should
never be used together. Do notgrease the threads of bolts before
installing them; they might slip out.
The jack only serves for changing
the wheels on the car with which itis provided or on cars of the samemodel. It must not be used forother purposes such as for instanceraising cars of other models. In nocase should it be used for repairs
under the car. Incorrect positioningof the jack may cause the jacked
car to fall. Do not use the jack forhigher capacities than stated on its
label.

Alfawiki.nl

200

WARNING
Snow chains cannot be
fitted on the compact
spare wheel, so, if a front wheel
is punctured and chains need tobe fitted, the front axle should be
fitted with normal wheels andthe compact spare wheel fitted to
the rear. This way, with two normal wheels at the front, snow
chain can be fitted thereby solving the emergency situation.
Never tamper with the inflation
valve.
Do not insert tools of any kind
between the rim and the tyre.
Check, and if necessary, restore
the pressure of the tyres and of
the compact spare wheel to thevalues given in the “Technical
Specifications” chapter.

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 201

CHANGING A WHEEL– Use the handle (A) to remove the pieceof stiff cover (B).

– Remove the wheel cap (A-fig. 4) (only versions with steel rims)

Please be informed that:– the jack mass is 2.100 kg.
– the jack requires no adjustment.
– the jack cannot be repaired. In theevent of breakage, it must be replaced byanother original one.
– no tools other than its operating crank
can be fitted to the jack.

– Loosen the clamping device (A-fig.
3).

– Using the wrench provided (A-fig.
5), loosen the fastening bolts by about
one turn.

– Take out the tool container (B) and takeit near the wheel to be changed.
– Take the spare wheel (C).

A0A0151m

To change a wheel, proceed as follows:– Stop the car in such a position that it is
not dangerous for the traffic, where it is possible to change the wheel safely. Where possible, park on a level, compact surface.
– Switch off the engine and engage thehandbrake.
– Engage first gear or reverse.

– Set the jack under the car, near thewheel to be changed taking care not to damage the plastic streamlined guard.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Work the jack crank (A-fig. 6), toextend it until the groove (B) on theupper part of jack is correctly inserted on thelower profile of the body (C) approx. 40 cm
from the profile of the wheelhouse.
– Work the jack and raise the car until
the wheel is a few centimetres from theground.

A0A0150m

A0A1059m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2

fig. 3

fig. 4201

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 202– Completely unscrew the fastening bolts
and remove the wheel.
– Make sure that the contact surfaces ofthe spare wheel with the hub are clean
and free of impurities which may later cause
the fastening bolts to slacken.
– Install the spare wheel matching thehole (A-fig. 7) with the correspondingpin (B).
– Using the wrench provided, fasten thefive bolts.
– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Using the wrench provided, fully tighten
the bolts in the sequence shown in fig. 8.

REFITTING ANORMAL WHEEL– Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove the spare
wheel.
For versions with steel rims:– Fit the normal wheel matching thehole (A-fig. 7) with the correspondingpin (B).
– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the wheel with the hub are clean and freeof impurities which may later cause the fastening bolts to slacken.
– Using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts.

– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the bolts in the sequence shown previously for the compact spare wheel fig. 8.
– Place the cap near the wheel so thatthe inflation valve can come through theslot provided on the cap.
– Press the circumference of the cap,
starting from the parts nearest to the inflation valve until it is inserted completely.
IMPORTANT Incorrect fitting may
cause the wheel cap to come off when the
car is travelling

A0A1140m

A0A0152m

Alfawiki.nl

202 fig. 5

fig. 6

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 203

For versions with alloy rims:– Tighten the pin (A-fig. 9) in one of
the fastening bolt holes on the wheel hub.
– Insert the wheel on the pin and, using
the wrench provided, tighten the four bolts
available. This is facilitated by the extension provided (B).
– Remove the pin (A-fig. 9) and tighten the last fastening bolt.
– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Using the wrench provided, tighten
the bolts in the sequence shown previously
for the compact spare wheel fig. 8.
After refitting a wheel:– stow the spare wheel in the space provided in the boot– insert the jack in its container forcing
it lightly to prevent it from vibrating whentravelling– place the tools used in the housings in
the container– stow the container complete with toolson the spare wheel and secure every
thing with the clamping device (A-fig.
3)– correctly re-position the stiff cover.
Versions with VDC excluded

WARNING
After using the spare
wheel and refitting thestandard wheel, it is necessary to

A0A0155m

WARNING
travel for approx. 30 km(20 minutes) on a mixed
road or approx. 15 km (10 minutes) on a highway until the software of the ABS/ASR control unit
recognises the size of the “normal”
wheel; in this period of time the car
may slightly go adrift on a side
during brakig and the ASR warning light (if fitted) may come on.
Therefore it is recommended totravel carefully and to avoid,
where possible, sharp braking. On
cars fitted with ASR travel for theabove mentioned distance with
the ASR turned off through thesuitable button.

A0A0156m

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A0157m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7

fig. 8

fig. 9203

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

FIX&GO KIT FOR
QUICK TYREREPAIRING(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car can be equipped with a tyrequick repairing kit called FIX&GO, replacing the tools and the compact spare wheel
provided with the car.
The quick repairing kit fig. 10 is placedin the boot inside the appropriate container, which includes also the screwdriver andthe tow ring.

Pagina 204

The quick repairing kit includes:– a bottle A-fig. 10 containing sealer
and fitted with:❒ filling pipe B❒ a sticker C bearing the notice “max.
80 km/h”, to be placed in a position
visible to the driver (on the instrument
panel) after fixing the tyre;– a leaflet with the instructions fig. 11
for a correct use of the quick repairing kit;
this leaflet shall be delivered to the personnel who will handle the tyre treatedwith the quick repairing kit;
– a pair of protective gloves in the sidecompartment of the compressor;– adapters for inflating different elements.

– a compressor D with pressure gauge
and fittings;

A0A1095m

A0A1096m

Alfawiki.nl

204

fig. 10

fig. 11

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 205

WARNING
Give the leaflet to thepersonnel who will handle
the tyre treated with the quick
repaiting kit.

It is necessary to know that:
The sealer included in the quick repairing
kit is good for temperatures between–20°C and +50°C.

WARNING
The sealer has expiry date.
Replace the bottle whose
sealer due date is expired.
In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies,
it is possible to fix tyres
having cracks with maximum diameter up to 4 mm.

WARNING
It is not possible to fix
cracks on the tyre sides. Do
not use the quick repairing kit if thetyre is damaged due to drivingwith the wheel flattened.

WARNING
In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deformation
is such that there is an air leakage)
fixing is not possible. Do not remove foreign bodies (screws ornails) which have penetrated the
Alfawiki.nl
tyre.

WARNINGThe bottle contains ethylene glycol. It contains
latex which might cause an allergy reaction. This substance is
toxic: do not swallow it andavoid contact with the eyes. It
may provoke sensitisation due toinhalation and contact. Avoid contact with the eyes, the skin andthe clothes. In case of contact,rinse with abundant water. If
swallowed do not induce vomit,
rinse the mouth, drink a lot ofwater and contact a medical doctor immediately. Keep the bottle
away from children. The productmust not be used by asthmatic
subjects. Do not inhale thevapours during fitting and suction
operations. If any allergy reaction should take place call a medical doctor. Keep the bottle in thesuitable compartment and keepaway from heat. The sealer has
expiry date.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

205

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 206

WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for more than 20
minutes: risk of overheating. The
quick repairing kit is not suitable
for a final repairing, therefore
repaired tyres must be used only
temporarily.

INFLATING PROCEDUREWARNING
Wear the protective gloves
provided with the quick repairing kit.
Proceed as follows:

Do not disperse the bottle and the sealer in theenvironment. Dispose of
it according to the national andlocal regulations.

– place the wheel with the valve A-fig.
12 in the position illustrated in the figure,engage the handbrake, then remove
the quick repairing kit and place it on the
ground next to the wheel;

A0A1097m– unscrew the tyre valve plug, take off thefilling pipe A-fig. 13 and screw the ringnut B-fig. 14 on the tyre valve;– make sure that the compressor switch
A-fig. 15 is in position 0 (off), start theengine, insert the plug G-fig. 16 in thesocket/lighter on the front tunnel andstart the compressor by taking the switch
to A-fig. 15 position I (on);– inflate the tyre to the correct pressure
value. You are advised to check the tyrepressure value on the pressure gauge Bfig. 15 with the compressor off, in orderto have a more accurate reading;

A0A1098m

A0A1099m

Alfawiki.nl

206 fig. 12

fig. 13

fig. 14

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 207– if in 5 minutes a pressure of at least
1.5 bars is not obtained, disengage thecompressor from the valve and the socket;
then move the car forwards by about 10
metres to distribute the sealer inside thetyre and repeat the inflating procedure;– if, also in this case, in 5 minutes fromthe compressor turning on a pressure of atleast 1.8 bars is not obtained, do not travel any further: the quick repairing kit cannot guarantee proper hold because thetyre is too much damaged. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services;– once the correct tyre pressure has
been reached, start driving immediately;WARNING
Place the sticker in a position where it can be clearly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treatedwith the quick repairing kit. Drive
carefully especially in a bend. Do
not overcome 80 km/h. Avoid
sudden acceleration or braking.

– after about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember
to engage the hzandbrake;

A0A1100m

A0A1039m– if at least 1.8 bars are detected, restore
the correct pressure (with the engine running and the handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car;– drive the car with great care to Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

WARNING
If the pressure is below
1.8 bars, do not travel
any further: the quick repairing
kit cannot guarantee proper holdbecause the tyre is too muchdamaged. Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GBWARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to communicate that thetyre has been repaired with thequick repairing kit. Give the leaflet
to the personnel who will handle
the tyre treated with the quick
repairing kit.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15

fig. 16207

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 208

ONLY FOR PRESSURECHECKING AND RESTORING

PROCEDURE FOR CHANGING
THE BOTTLE

The compressor can also be used only for
restoring the tyre pressure. Disengage thequick coupling A-fig. 17 and connect it
directly to the valve of the tyre to be inflated fig. 18; this way the bottle will not be
connected to the compressor and no sealer
will be injected.

Proceed as follows:– disengage the coupling A-fig. 19 anddisconnect the pipe B;– turn the bottle to be changed counterclockwise and raise it;

WARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to communicate that thetyre has been repaired with thequick repairing kit. Give thesticker to the personnel who will
carry out the restoring operations.

– fit the new bottle and turn it clockwise;– fit the coupling A or connect the pipe
B into its housing.

A0A1101m

A0A1102m

A0A1103m

Alfawiki.nl

208 fig. 17

fig. 18

fig. 19

4-07-2008

12:04

WHEN NEEDING TO
CHANGE A BULBWARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking account of the system specifications may cause failures and therisk of fire.

WARNING
Where possible, it is advisable to have bulbs
changed c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The correct operation and aiming of the outer lights
are vital to the safety of the car
and its passengers and the subject
to specific laws.

Pagina 209

WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent
bulb is touched with the fingers,
its lighting intensity is reduced
and the life of the bulb may becompromised. If touched accidentally, rub the bulb with a clothmoistened with methylated spirit
and allow to dry.

WARNING
Because of the highsupply voltage, possible replacement of Xenon
lamps must be carried out byskilled personnel only: dangerof death! Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GBWARNING
Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas, in the caseof breakage they may burst.

Alfawiki.nl

209

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 210

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSTYPES OF BULBS (fig. 20)– When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to yourcar:

– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”
in this chapter.
– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power.
– Always check headlight aiming after
changing a bulb to ensure they are safe.

A.

All glass bulbs
These are pressed on. Pull toremove.

B.

Bayonet type bulbs
Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise to remove this type of bulb
from its holder.

C.

Tubular bulbs
Free them from their contacts toremove.

D.-E. Halogen bulbs
To remove, free it from the clip on
its housing.
F.

A0A0503m

Alfawiki.nl

210

Xenon lamps
To remove the bulb, slacken the fastening ring nut and release theretaining ring.

fig. 20

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 211

BULBS

FIGURE 20

TYPE

POWER

High beam

D

H1

55W

Low beam

D

H7

55W

Anabbaglianti a scarica di gas Xenon

F

DS2

35W

Front sidelights

B

H6W

6W

Foglights

E

H1

55W

Front direction indicators

B

PY21W

21W

Side direction indicators

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicators

B

P21W

21W

Rear sidelights - braking lights

B

P21/5W

5W/21W

Third stop (additional braking lights)

A

W2.3W

2.3W

Reversing light

B

P21W

21W

Rear foglights

B

P21W

21W

Number plate light

A

W5W

5W

Puddle lights

C

C5W

5W

Front roof light

C

C10W

10W

Rear roof light

C

C10W

10W

Courtesy mirror light

A

W1.2W

1.2W

Glovebox light

A

W5W

5W

C
Alfawiki.nl

C5W

5W

Boot light

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

211

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 212

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUTREPLACEMENT OF XENONLIGHTS
Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.
The front light units contain the side light,
dipped beam, main beam and fog lightbulbs.

WARNING
Because of the highsupply voltage, possible
replacement of Xenon lamps must
be carried out by skilled personnel only: danger of death! Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

HALOGEN HEADLIGHTS

The front light units contain the side light,
dipped beam, main beam and front direction indicator bulbs.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system notcarried out correctly and without
taking account of the system
specifications may cause failures
and the risk of fire.

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 21):

IMPORTANT See the previous chapter“When needing to change a bulb” for thetype of bulb and power rating.

A0A1066m

Alfawiki.nl

212

fig. 21(A) Dipped beam headlights(B) Main beam headlights(C) Sidelights(D) Front direction indicators.
IMPORTANT A slight layer of steam(fogging) can appear on the inside surfaceof the beam transparent cover: this is nota defect. The presence of condensate traces
in beams is a natural phenomenon, due to
low temperature and to the degree of humidity in the air. These traces will disappear
when the beams are turned on. Instead thepresence of drops inside the beam indicateswater infiltration: in ths case contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 213

Front side lights (fig. 24)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Fit a new bulb, making the tabs on themetallic part coincide with the grooves on
the reflector, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).

– Remove the protective rubber cover.

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).

– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Press the clips (A) and remove the bulb
holder.

Dipped beam headlights(fig. 22-23)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective rubber cover.

– Withdraw the bult holder (B) which issnap-fitted and change it.

– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Refit the bulb holder making sure thatthe retaining clips click into place (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

A0A1067m

A0A1068m

A0A1069m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 22

fig. 23

fig. 24

213

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 214

Main beam headlights(fig. 25-26)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective rubber cover.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).
– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Release the bulb catch (B).

Front direction indicators(fig. 27)
To change the bulb (orange), proceed asfollows:– Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise(A) and remove it.
– Remove the bulb pushing lightly andturning counterclockwise.

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Fit the new bulb pushing lightly and turning clockwise .
– Refit the bulb holder turning clockwise,
checking that it is secured correctly.

A0A1070m

A0A1071m

A0A1072m

Alfawiki.nl

214 fig. 25

fig. 26

fig. 27

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 215

FOG LIGHTS (fig. 28)
IMPORTANT To replace the front foglight bulbs and adjust the headlights contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

WARNINGThe efficiency of the lights
will be decreased and may
cause incovenience to other road
users if the light units are notcorrectly adjusted. If in doubt
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services to have them checked
and adjusted if necessary.

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 29)
– Push the transparent cover (A)towards the rear of the car to compress
the catch. Release the front part andremove this unit.
– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clockwise and remove it from the cover.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Remove the snap-fitted bulb andreplace it.
– Insert the bulb holder (B) in the transparent cover (A), then position the unit
making sure the catch clicks into place.

A0A1073m

A0A1040m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 28

fig. 29215

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 216– Withdraw the light unit outwards.

REVERSING LIGHT
AND REAR FOG GUARDS(fig. 30-31)– Slacken the electric connector (C).

The reversing light and rear fog guard arein the tail light until fastened to the tailgate;
they are to be found respectively one on theright and the other on the left of the car facing forwards.

– Slacken the screws (D), and remove
the bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb pushing gently andturning counterclockwise.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulb
holder and tighten the screws (D).

– Open the tailgate.

– Re-tighten the electric connector (C).

– Remove the cap (A) then, using the extension with the screwdriver provided (working as illustrated), loosen the fastening nuts(B) of the light unit concerned.

– Refit the light unit on the tailgate tightening the nuts (B), then refit the cap (A)pressing it on.

A0A0167m

REAR DIRECTION INDICATORSAND REAR SIDELIGHTSBRAKING LIGHTS (fig. 32-33)
The rear direction indicators and the side
lights-braking lights are in the tail light unit
fastened to the body.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– From inside the boot, open the preformed trim (A) then, using the extension
and the screwdriver provided (working as illustrated), slacken the nuts (B) fastening
the light unit.
– Withdraw the light unit outwards.

A0A0168m

A0A0169m

Alfawiki.nl

216 fig. 30

fig. 31

fig. 32

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 217

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS(fig. 34)

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT(THIRD STOP) (fig. 35-36)

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:

To change the bulbs, proceeed as follows:– Remove the bulb to be changed pushing gently and turning counterclockwise:(E) - bulb for rear sidelight/braking light.
(F) - bulb for rear direction indicator.

– Work on the transparent cover frame,in the point shown by the arrow to compress
the catch (B). Free the opposite end and remove the unit.

– Open the tailgate, slacken the screws(A) then disconnect the electric connection (B).

– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulb
holder and tighten the screw (D).

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise (A)and remove it from the transparent cover.

– Re-connect the electric connector (C).

– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.

– Refit the light unit on the body tightening
the screws (B).

– Insert the bulb holder (A) in the transparent cover then refit the unit checking thatthe catch clicks into place (B).

– Disconnect the electric connector (C).
– Slacken the screw (D), and remove thebulb holder.

– Close the preformed trim (A).

A0A0170m– Remove the transparent cover- bulb
holder (C) from the support (D).

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Working on the side catches (E), release
the bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb to be changed.

A0A0171m

A0A0172m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 33

fig. 34

fig. 35217

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 218– Insert the bulb holder making sure theside catches click into place (E).
– Refit the transparent cover-bulb holder(C) in the support (D).
– Re-connect the electric connector (B).
– Refit the unit on the tailgate tightening
the screws (A).

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGTH GOES OUTPUDDLE LIGHT (fig. 37)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the door and slacken the screw(A) fastening the transparent covers.

FRONT ROOF LIGHT(fig. 38-39)– Remove the unit composed of the twotransparent covers then change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts making surethat the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts.

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:– Realign the two transparent covers andtighten the fastening screw (A).

A0A0173m– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the points shwon by the arrow (in correspondence with the retainer catches).
– Open the protective cover (B).
– Replace the bulb concerned releasing itfrom the side contacts making sure that the
new bulb is correctly clamped between thecontacts.

A0A0174m

A0A0175m

Alfawiki.nl

218 fig. 36

fig. 37

fig. 38

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 219– Close the protective cover (B).
– Refit the light unit pressing gently in correspondence with the retainer catches, until hearing the click.

REAR ROOF LIGHT(fig. 40-41)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Refit the light unit in the correct position
inserting first the side with the connector,
then pressing the other side until the catchclicks into place (B).

– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the point shown by the arrow.
– Replace the bulb releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the new bulb
is correctly clamped between the contacts.

A0A0176m

A0A0177m

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A0178m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 39

fig. 40

fig. 41219

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 220

GLOVEBOX LIGHT (fig. 42-43)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into place.

– Open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit (A) levering in the point shown by
the arrow.

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 44-45)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the point shown by the arrow.

– Open the protection (B) and change thesnap-fitted bulb.
– Close the protection (B) on the transparent cover.

A0A0181m

A0A0182m

A0A0183m

Alfawiki.nl

220 fig. 42

fig. 43

fig. 44

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 221– Open the the protective cover (B) andreplace the bulb releasing it from the side
contacts, making sure that the new bulb iscorrectly clamped between the contacts.
– Close the protective cover (B).
– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into place.

IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE
GENERAL(B) - Undamaged fuse

The fuse is a protective device for the electric system: it comes into action (i.e. it cutsoff) mainly due to a fault or improper action
on the system.

(C) - Fuse with damaged filament.

When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor element(A-fig. 46) must be intact; if not,replace the fuse with one of the same amp
rating (same colour).

A0A0184m

Remove the blown fuse using the pincer
provided (D), in the control box.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.

A0A0185m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 45

fig. 46221

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

WARNING
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating; DANGER OF FIRE.

Pagina 222

WARNING
Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that all theother services are switched off
and/or disengaged.

Fuses of the car are grouped in three control boxes, to be found respectively on thedashboard, on the battery positive pole andnext to the actual battery.
Access is gained to the control box on thedashboard by slackening the two retainers(A-fig. 47) and removing the protective
trim (B).
To gain access to the fuses in the fuseboxon the battery post, remove the protective
cover pressing the opening catches (front).

WARNING
If a general fuse (MAXIFUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cutsin, do not attempt any repair andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

WARNING
If a fuse blows again, contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

A0A1082m

Alfawiki.nl

222

fig. 47

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 223

A0A0134m

IN AN EMERGENCY

Access is gained to the control box next tothe battery releasing the perimetral catches(A-fig. 48) and removing the protective
cover (B).
To locate the protection fuses, consulting
the summary table on the following pages,
refer to the following illustrations fig. 49,
fig. 50 and 51.

fig. 49 - Control box on dashboard
A0A0187m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 48223

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 224

A0A0215m

IN AN EMERGENCY

A0A0137m

fig. 50 - Control box next to battery

fig. 51 - Control box on battery positive pole

Alfawiki.nl

224

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 225

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTSFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Hazard lights

49

F53

10

Right dipped-beam headlight

49

F12

10

Left dipped-beam headlight

49

F13

10

Right main-beam headlight

50

F14

10

Left main-beam headlight

50

F15

10

Foglights

50

F30

15

Braking light

49

F37

10

Reversing light

49

F35

7.5

+30 direction indicators

49

F53

10

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Selespeed transmission pump50

F03 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Additional heater

51

F73 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Headlight aiming device

49

F13

10

Climate control system

49

F31

7.5

Climate control system

49

F39

15

Climate control compressor

50

F19

7.5

Heater unit relay coils

49

F31

7.5

SERVICES

Alfawiki.nl
IMPORTANT Strictly observe the fuse amp: in case of doubt contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

225

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

SERVICES

Pagina 226

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Key-operated +30

49

F32

15

Selespeed transmission

49

F32

15

Selespeed transmission

49

F51

7.5

Radio

49

F39

15

Navigator

49

F39

15

Rearscreen wiper

49

F52

15

Rear left power window

49

F33

20

Rear right power window

49

F34

20

Rearscreen heating

49

F40

30

Windscreen - rearscreen washer (two-way pump)

49

F43

30

Cigar lighter

49

F44

20

Seats with electric heating

49

F45

15

Heated wing mirrors – heated nozzles

49

F41

7.5

Cruise control

49

F35

7.5

Central door locking

49

F38

20

Headlight washer

50

F09

20

Services + 30

49

F39

15

Primary services (electronic injection)

50

F17

7.5

50

F11

15

49

F49

7.5

Secondary services (electronic injection)

226

12:04

Secondary services

Alfawiki.nl

4-07-2008

12:04

SERVICES

Pagina 227

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Volumetric sensors

49

F39

15

VDC system sensor

49

F42

7.5

Steering angle sensor

49

F42

7.5

EOBD system diagnosis socket

49

F39

15

Cell phone provision

49

F39

15

Driver’s door control unit supply

49

F47

20

Passenger’s door control unit supply

49

F48

20

Control lighting

49

F49

7.5

Climate control system control lighting

49

F35

7.5

Instrument cluster

49

F37

10

Instrument cluster

49

F53

10

Driver’s door control unit

49

F39

15

ABS control unit

49

F42

7.5

ABS control unit

50

F04 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Dashboard control unit

50

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Boot control unit

49

F39

15

Air - bag control unit

49

F50

7.5

Electronic injection control unit +30

50

F18

7.5

Engine compartment control box (petrol versions)

51

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

125

51

F71 (MAXI-FUSE)

70

49

F36

10

Dashboard control unit
Trailer control unit

Alfawiki.nl

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

227

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 228

SERVICESFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Climate control fan

50

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan (first speed - petrol versions)50

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Radiator fan (second speed - petrol versions)50

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Horn

50

F10

15

Fuel pump

50

F21

15

Injectors (petrol versions)

50

F22

15

Ignition coils

50

F21

15

Tailgate electric unlocking

49

F60 (*)

25

Electronic injection system

50

F16

7.5

Bose system

49

F61 (*)

15

Bose system

49

F62 (*)

15

Sunroof49

F63 (*)

20

Sunroof

49

F46

15

Additional heater

50

F08

30

Ignition switch

51

F72 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Glow plug warming (diesel versions)50

F01 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Heated fuel oil filter (diesel versions)

50

F20

20

Engine compartment control box (diesel versions)

51

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

150

Radiator fan (first speed – diesel versions)50

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan (second speed – diesel versions)50

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

60

F22

20

Injectors (diesel versions)228(*) Fuse behind dashboard control box on an auxiliary bracket.

50
Alfawiki.nl

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 229

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY
Before anything else, you are advised toread the precautions for preventing the battery from draining and for ensuring long lifein the “Car maintenance” chapter.
CHARGING THE BATTERYIMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for 24 hours. Charging for a longer time
may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

STARTING WITH AN
AUXILIARY BATTERY
See “Starting with an auxiliary battery” inthis chapter.

– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery
terminal ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

WARNINGThe liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated place,away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of
explosion and fire.

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it
may burst. If freezing has occurred,
the battery should be checked before charging by specialised personnel, to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged
and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of leaking poisonousand corrosive acid.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Strictly avoid using a battery charger to start theengine: you may damage
the electronic systems, in particular the ignition and fuel supply control units.

Alfawiki.nl229

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 230

IF THE CAR IS TO BE TOWEDThe tow ring supplied with the car ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.
To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on
the front (fig. 52) or rear bumper (fig.
53). To do this, if using the flat-bladed
screwdriver provided, protect the tip with asoft cloth to avoid damaging the car.

WARNING
Before tightening the ring
carefully clean the threaded housing. Before beginning to
tow the car, make sure that thering is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.

– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

A0A1083m

A0A1084m

Alfawiki.nl

230 fig. 52

fig. 53WARNING
Before starting to tow,turn the ignition key to
MAR and back to STOP again without removing it. Removing the key
automatically engages the steering
lock resulting in the impossibility
to steer the wheels. When towing
remember that without the help of
the engine brake and power steering greater effort is required on thepedal and steering wheel. Do notuse flexible cables for towing andavoid jerks. During towing operations make sure that fastening thejoints does not damage the components in contact with it. When
towing the car, it is compulsory tofollow specific traffic regulations
concerning both the towing device
and behaviour on the road.

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 231

WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the car.

IF THE CAR IS TO BE
LIFTED
USING THE JACKIMPORTANT For versions with Selespeed transmission, make sure that thegears are in neutral (N) (checking that the
car moves if pushed) and then proceed as
for towing a normal car with mechanicaltransmission, following the instructions given previously.
Should it be impossible to set the gears toneutral, do not tow the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

See paragraph “In the event of a puncture” in this chapter.

WARNING

The car may fall if the jackis not positioned correctly.
Never use the jack for higher capacities than the one stated on thelabel.

Please be informed that:IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– lthe jack mass is approx. 2.100 kg;– the jack requires no adjustment;– the jack cannot be repaired and in theevent of a fault it must be replaced by another original one;
– no tool other than its crancking device
may be fitted on the jack.

USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
The car should be lifted only at the side
setting the ends of the arms of the workshop lift in the area shown in fig. 54-55.

WARNING
The purpose of the jack isonly for replacing wheelson the car with which it is provided or on cars of the same model. It
must never be used for other purposes such as for example raisingcars of other models. In no casemust it be used for repairs under
the car.

A0A1085m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 54231

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 232

Take care when positioning the arms of the lift orworkshop lift to avoid
damaging the side strips.

IN THE EVENT
OF AN ACCIDENT– In motorways pileups, especially withpoor visibility, the risk of being involved inother crashes is high. Leave the car immediately and go beyond the guard-rail.

– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved, stop at
least a few dozen metres away from the accident.

– If doors are blocked, do not try to get
out of the car breaking the windscreen whichis stratified. The windows and rear screen
are easier to break.

– On motorways, stop without blocking
the emergency lane.

– Remove the ignition key of the cars involved.

– Turn the engine off and the hazard warning lights on.

– If you note a smell of fuel or other chemical product, do not smoke and have cigarettes stubbed out.

– At night, illuminate the place of the accident with the headlights.
– Take care, do not risk being run over.
– Signal the accident placing the triangle
at regulation distance in a clearly visible place.

A0A1086m– Call the emergency organisation, giving the most accurate information possible.
On motorways use the special phones provided.

Alfawiki.nl

232 fig. 55– To put out fires, even small ones, use
the extinguisher, blankets, sand, or earth.
Never use water.
– If use of the lighting system is not necessary, disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).

4-07-2008

12:04

Pagina 233

IF PEOPLE ARE INJUREDFIRST AID KIT– An injured person must never be abandoned. Helping is compulsory also for persons not directly involved in the accident.

In addition to the first-aid kit, it is also wise
to keep an extinguisher and a blanket in
the car.

– Do not crowd around injured people.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on the way, and stay near to overcome
any panic.

IN AN EMERGENCY

197-233_Alfa147 Q2 GB– Release or cut the seat belt restraining
injured persons.
– Do not give injured persons anything
to drink.
– An injured person should never be
moved except in the following circumstances.
– Remove an injured person from the car
only in danger of fire, sinking or falling.
When removing an injured person: do notpull the limbs or bend the head and keep
the body as horizontal as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

233

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 234

VEHICLE MAINTENANCESCHEDULEDSERVICING
Correct maintenance is determined in ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
IMPORTANT On versions fitted with reconfigurable multifunction display, at 2000
km from the maintenance deadline, the display will show “REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL” which is shown again turning the ignition key to MAR, every 200 km. For further details, see “Service” in the “Reconfigurable multifunction display”.

It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before the 20,000 km service coupon and later, between one coupon
and another, ordinary care is still necessary
such as for example routinely checking andtopping up the level of fluids, checking thetyre pressure, etc...
IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, at pre-established times.

Alfawiki.nl

234

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 235

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen washer system, adjust spray jets

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of front disk brake pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check wear conditions of rear disk brake pads

●

●

●

Sight check the conditions of: body exterior, underbody protection,
stiff pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes),
rubber parts (boots - sleeves - bushes etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight check boot and bonnet lock cleaning conditions, lever cleaning and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight check for accessory drive belt conditions

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB●

Check handbrake lever stroke adjustment

●

●

●

●

Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)

●

●

●

●

Change air cleaner cartridge (JTD versions)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and if necessary top up the automatic transmission oil level(versions with Selespeed transmission)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Alfawiki.nl

235

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 236

Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

●

Sight check for conditions of timing gear drive toothed belt (diesel versions)●

Check operation of engine control system (through diagnosis socket)

●
●

●

●

Check valve clearance (JTDM 120HP versions)

●

●

●

●

Check mechanical transmission oil level●

Check emissions/smoke at the exhaust (diesel versions)

180

●

●

●

●

●

Change counter-rotating shaft drive belt (2.0 T.SPARK versions)●

Change timing gear drive belt (T.SPARK versions) (*)●

Change timing gear drive belt (diesel versions) (*)●

Change accessory poly-V drive belt

●

●

●

Change spark plugs (petrol versions)●

Change spark plugs (1.6 T.SPARK 105HP versions)●●

Change engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions) (or every 24 months)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions without DPF)(**)(or every 24 months)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions with DPF)(**)(or every 24 months)●

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)●●

Change fuel filter (diesel versions)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change pollen filter (or every year)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years.
(**) The engine oil and oil filter should be changed depending on their actual condition, whichis indicated by a warning light/message on the control panel or at least every 2 years.
Alfawiki.nl

236

If the car is used mainly on urban routes or if the yearly kilometres travelled are less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be changed every 12 months.

4-07-2008

12:05

ANNUAL INSPECTION
PROGRAMMEFor cars with an annual mileageof below 20,000 km (for example
about 10,000 km) the following
yearly inspection programme is advised:

Pagina 237– Sight check for conditions of: engine,
gearbox, transmission, pipes (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts (boots sleeves - bushes etc..), brake and fuel supply system hoses– Check battery charge– Sight check for conditions of various
drive belts

ADDITIONALOPERATIONSEvery 1000 km or before long journeys,
check and if necessary top up:– engine coolant fluid level– brake/hydraulic clutch control fluid
level– Check tyre conditions/wear and if necessary adjust the pressure (including spare
wheel)– Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen
washer, battery etc. )– Check operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)– Change engine oil and filter– windscreen/rearscreen and headlamp
washer fluid level– Change pollen filter.

– tyre pressure and conditions.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB– power steering fluid level

Every 3000 km check and if necessary
top up the engine oil level.

– Check operation of windscreen wiper
system, spray jet adjustment

The use of FL Selenia products is recommended which have been designed andmade expressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see“Refuelling” in the “Technical Specifications” chapter).

– Check position/wear of windscreen/
rearscreen wiper blades– Check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear– Check boot and bonnet lock cleaning
conditions, lever cleaning and lubrication

Alfawiki.nl

237

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 238

IMPORTANTEngine oil

IMPORTANTAir cleaner

IMPORTANT
Pollen filter

Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:

Using the car on dusty roads change theair cleaner more frequently than specified in
the Schedule Maintenance Programme.

– trailer or caravan towing

For any doubts concerning the intervals between the engine oil and air cleaner replacement in relation to how the car is used,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

If the car is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced if
a reduction of the amount of air admitted tothe passenger compartment is noted.

– dusty roads– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero
– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving (e.g. taxis or door-to-doordeliveries) or in case of a long term inactivity.
Replace engine oil more frequently thanrequired on Service Schedule.
IMPORTANT
Diesel filter
The different grades of purity in diesel fuel normally available might make it necessary to replace the filter more frequently
than indicated in the Service Schedule. If
the engine misfires it shows the filter needschanging.

IMPORTANT
Battery
It is advisable to check the battery charge,
preferably at the onset of winter, to preventthe possibility of the electrolyte freezing.
This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used mainly for shorttrips, or if it is fitted with accessories thatpermanently absorb electricity even with theignition key removed, especially in the caseof after market accessories.
If the car is used in hot climates or particularly harsh conditions it is wise to check thelevel of the battery fluid (electrolyte) more
frequently than specified in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme.

Alfawiki.nl

238

Car maintenance should be
entrusted to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services. For
routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out
yourself, always make sure you
have the proper equipment, genuine Alfa Romeo spares and thenecessary fluids; do not however
carry out these operations if you
have no experience.

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 239

A0A0192m

VEHICLE MAINTENANCECHECKING LEVELSWARNING
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammablevapours may be present, with therisk of fire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage
the car.

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Powersteering fluid - 7 Selespeed transmission oil

fig. 1 - Versions 1.6 T.SPARK (105HP) - 1.6 T.SPARK (120HP) - 2.0 T.SPARK
A0A0194m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2 - 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed versions239

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 240

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

A0A0345m

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Powersteering fluid
fig. 3 - JTDM (120HP) versions
A0A0396m

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Powersteering fluif

240

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 4 - JTDM (150HP) versions

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 241

ENGINE OIL (fig. 5-6-7)
The engine oil should be checked with the
car on a level surface a few minutes (about5) after the engine has been switched off.
Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and check thatthe level is within the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick. The interval between
the MIN and MAX marks correspond toabout one litre of oil.

Do not add oil with specifications (classification,
viscosity) other than thoseof the oil already in the engine.

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filter neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.

IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals
that the level is above the MAX mark, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to havethe correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After topping up the oil,
before checking the level again, run the engine a few seconds and wait for a few minutes ater stopping it.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GBWARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

A0A0195m

A0A0347m

A0A0398m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 5 - T.SPARK versions

fig. 6 - JTDM (120HP) versions

fig. 7 - JTDM (150HP) versions

241

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Engine oil consumption
Max engine oil consumption is usually 400
grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore engine oil consumption
may be considered stabilised only after the
first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.
IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the car.

Used engine oil and filter
contain harmful substances
for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have the oil and the filter
changed, as they are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting nature and the law.

Pagina 242

SELESPEED GEARBOX OIL(fig. 8)The Selespeed transmission oil should bechecked with the car on a level surface andwith the engine stopped and cold.
To check the level, proceed as follows:– turn the ignition key to MAR;– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick integrated with the cap;
– if the oil is below the MAX mark, top
up to reach the correct level;

Used gearbox oil contains
dangerous substances forthe environment. For changing the oil we advise contacting Alfa Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposing of used
oil respecting nature and the law.

– after refitting the cap, insert the breather
tube firmly on the housing on the cap andturn the ignition to STOP.

A0A0197m

Alfawiki.nl

242

Do not add oil with specifications other than that
already in the gearbox.

fig. 8WARNING
Be very careful working inside the engine compartment if the engine is hot: danger ofburns. Remember that the fan may
cut in if the engine is very hot: danger of injury.

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 243

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID(fig. 9)WARNING
Do not remove the cap
when the engine is hot:danger of burns.

The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank.

If the level is low, loosen the header tankcap (A) and slowly pour through the filler
the fluid specified in the “Fluids and Lubricants” table in the “Technical Specifications”
chapter until nearing the MAX mark; forthis operations contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection down
to –40°C.
For particularly hard climate conditions, werecommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP
and 40% demineralized water mixture.

POWER STEERING FLUID(fig. 10-11)
Check that the level of the oil in the reservoir is at maximum.
This operation should be carried out withthe car on a level surface and the engine
switched off and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX
mark on the reservoir or coincides with theupper notch (maximum level) on the dipstick (A) integral with the reservoir cap.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only withanother genuine one, otherwise
system efficiency could be compromised.

A0A0240m

A0A0216m

For topping up use fluidsof the same type containedin the cooling system.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9fig. 10 - T.SPARK versions

243

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 244

If the oil level in the reservoir is below thespecified one, top up only with one of the
products listed in the “Fluids and Lubricants”
table in the “Technical Specifications” chapter proceeding as follows:– Start the engine and wait for the oil level in the reservoir to stabilise.

WARNING
Do not allow the power
steering fluid to touch hotparts of the engine: it is inflammable.

IMPORTANT For this operation it ishowever recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

– With the engine running, turn the steering wheel lock to lock a few times.
– Top up to the MAX level notch, thenrefit the cap.

NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A
and the surrounding surface. When opening
the cap take the utmost care to prevent impurities entering the tank. When topping up,
always use a funnel with built-in filter withmesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm.

Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Make sure that the highly corrosive brake fluid
does not drip onto thepaintwork. If it does, wash it off
immediately with water.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 12)
A0A0400m

Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum. Top up with the brake fluid specified in the table “Fluids and lubricants” (see section “Technical Specifications").

A0A0217m

Alfawiki.nl

244 fig. 11 - JTDM versions

fig. 12

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 245

WARNING
Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, wash the parts concerned
immediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swallowed.

WARNINGThe π, symbol on the container indicates synthetic
brake fluid, distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral fluids irreversibly damages the special braking system rubber seals.

WINDSCREEN/
REARSCREEN/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID (fig. 13)
Open the cap (A) and check the level inthe reservoir.
If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 fluid as follows:– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;– in the case of temperatures below -20°C
use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
fluid neat.

A0A0242m

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

WARNING
Some commercial additives
for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine compartment contains hot components
which may set it on fire.

WARNING
Do not travel with the windscreen/rearscreen washer
reservoir empty: the action of thewindscreen washer is fundamental
for improving vision.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

To avoid damaging thepump motor, do not use
the windscreen/rearscreen
washers when the reservoir isempty.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 13245

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

AIR CLEANER
The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send
to the control unit the electric signals needed for correct operation of the injection andignition system.
It must therefore always be in perfect conditions, to ensure correct operation of theengine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.

Pagina 246

If the car is habituallyused in dusty areas, thecleaner should be replaced
at shorter intervals than thosespecified in the Programmed Maintenance Schedule.

Any attempt to clean thecleaner may damage it,leading to serious engine
damage.

If the operations concerning cleaner replacement described below are not carried out correctly and with the due
precautions, they may compromise
the travelling safety of the car. You
are recommended to have this operation carried out by Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

246

DIESEL FUEL FILTER(diesel versions)

DRAINING CONDENSATIONWATER
The presence of water inthe supply circuit may
cause serious damage tothe entire injection system andcause irregular running of the engine. If the c warning light turnson (or, on some versions, symbol +message are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display)contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services as soon as possible tohave the system relieved. If thesame warning appears immediately after refuelling, some water
could have been introduced in thereservoir: in this case turn off theengine immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 247

POLLEN FILTERBATTERY

This has a mechanical/electrostatic air filtering action, provided that the windows andthe doors are shut.

The battery is of the “Limited maintenance” type: under normal conditions of use
the electrolyte does not need topping up
with distilled water.

Have the pollen filter checked once a year
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, preferably at the onset of summer.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the battery checked/replaced.

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanìspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
IMPORTANT The failure to replace thefilter can considerably reduce the effectiveness of the climate control system.

A0A0224m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 14

Batteries contain harmful
substances for the environment. To change thebattery we advise contacting Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposal respecting nature and the law.
The incorrect installationof electric accessories may
cause seiour damage to thecar. If after buying the car you wish
to install accessories (alarm, radio,
radiotelephone, etc.) contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whowill be able to suggest the mostsuitable devices and above all advise about the need to use a more
powerful battery.
If the car is to remain inactive for a long time invery cold conditions, remove the battery and take it to awarm place, otherwise it may
freeze.
At any battery removal/refitting wait for
at least 3 minutes before
starting the enigne, to allow theclimate control unit to reset the position of the electric actuators
which control the air temperatureand distribution.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

247

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 248

WARNING
When working on the battery or close to it, always
protect the eyes with goggles.

WARNINGThe liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated placeaway from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of
explosion and fire.

WARNING
Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.

CHARGING THE BATTERYCHECKING THE CHARGE

Charge the battery as follows:

The battery charge may be checked
through the indicator A-fig. 14 (where required) set on the battery cover and acting
according to the colour the indicator shows.

– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).

Should the battery be not fitted with battery charge inspection device (optical electrolyte indicator), inspection operations shallbe carried out by skilled personnel only.
Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 15) on the battery itself.

IMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for
24 hours. Charging for a longer time may
damage the battery.

– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminal ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

A0A0393m

Brilliantwhite colour
Dark colour
without green
area in the centre
Dark colour with green
Alfawiki.nl
area in the centre

248 fig. 15

Top up the electrolyte

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services

Low charge level

Charge the battery(you are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services)

Sufficient electrolyte level
and charge

No action

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 249

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it
may burst. If freezing has occurred,
the battery should be checked before charging by specialised personnel, to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged
and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of leaking poisonousand corrosive acid.

IMPORTANT If the battery is kept witha charge of below 50% it is damaged by sulphation, its starting capability is reduced and
it is also more subject to the possibility offreezing (this may occur already at –10°C). In the event of a prolonged inactivity,refer to the paragraph “car inactivity”, in thechapter “Correct use of the car”.

CHANGING THE BATTERY
When changing the battery it should be replaced with another original one with thesame characteristics. If it is replaced by abattery with different characteristics, themaintenance intervals given in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme in this chapter are no longer valid and for maintenanceit will be necessary to follow the battery
Manufacturer’s instructions.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid rapidly draining the battery andensure that it continues to work correctly,
the following should be noted:– The terminals must always be firmly
tightened.
– Within reason, avoid using electrical devices for a long time when the engine isswitched off (radio, hazard warning lights,
parking lights, etc.).

– Before carrying out any work on theelectric system, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
– If after buying the car, you wish to install electric accessories which require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft function etc.) or accessories that burden the electric system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the car’s electric system
is capable of withstanding the load required,or whether it should be integrated with amore powerful battery. In fact, as some ofthese devices continue absorbing energy
even when the ignition key is off (car stationary, engine off), they gradually drain thebattery.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB– When the car is parked in a garage, ensure that the doors, bonnet, boot and inner lids are closed properly so that the lights
do not stay on permanently.

Alfawiki.nl

249

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

The maximum absorption of all the accessories (standard and fitted afterwards)
should be 0,6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as
shown in the following table:

Pagina 250

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITSWith normal use of the car, no particularprecautions need to be taken.

Battery

Maximum permissible
loadless absorption

50 Ah

30 mA

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption switched on by theuser, such as for example: baby bottle warmers, vacuum cleaner, mobile phone, mini
fridge, etc., quicken the battery draining process if they are turned on with theengine off or running at idle speed.
IMPORTANT When installing additional systems on the car, bear in mind that improper branches on connections of the carwiring are dangerous, particularly if safety
devices are involved.

– If electric welding is to be carried out on
the body, remember to disconnect the electronic control units, or remove them if thework involves high temperatures.

In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions given below must absolutely be adhered to:– Always switch off the engine before disconnecting the battery from the electric system.
– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric system.
– When starting in an emergency, only
use an auxiliary battery and not a battery
charger.
– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.
– Before disconnecting or connecting theterminals of electronic units, ensure that theignition key is not in the MAR position.

Alfawiki.nl

250– Do not check for current in the cables by
short-circuiting the ends.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system carriedout incorrectly and without taking
account of the specifications of thesystem, may cause operating faults
with the risk of fire.

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 251

WHEELS AND TYRES

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear (fig. 16):
A - Normal pressure; tread evenly worn.

TYRE PRESSURE
Check the tyre pressure of every wheel, including the spare, every two weeks and before a long journey.
The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use. For the correct tyre
inflation pressure, see “Wheels” in “Technical specifications” section.

WARNING
Remember that car roadholding also depends oncorrect tyre inflation pressure.

B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat edges.
C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

WARNING
Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of tyrewith the possibility of serious damage to it.

Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.
A0A0225m

WARNINGS
Where possible, avoid sudden braking, tyresquealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres. Routinely check the tyres forcuts on the sides, swelllings or uneven tread
wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Serrvices.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Avoid overloading the car when travelling:
this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.
If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyreitself, the rim, suspensions and steering system. Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are a signof aging. In any case, if the tyres have beenon the car for 6 years, they should bechecked by specialised personnel, to see ifthey can still be used. Also remember tocheck the compact spare wheel.
In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 16251

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 252

The Alfa 147 uses Tubeless tyres.
Never use an inner tube with these tyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve.
To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres it is advisable to change over every
10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping themon the same side of the car so as not to reverse the direction of rotation (fig. 17).

WARNING
Alloy rim painting involving temperatures exceeding 150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristics
could be impaired.

RUBBER HOSESWARNING
Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them fromthe right of the car to the left andvice versa.

As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programme. Indeed, ozone, high temperatures
and the prolonged lack of fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking of
the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful control is therefore necessary.

A0A1087m

BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products; TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:– If the temperature falls below zero makesure that ice has not frozen the rubber
against the glass. If necessary, thaw using
an antifreeze product.
– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.
– Do not operate the windscreen andrearscreen wipers on dry glass.

Alfawiki.nl

252 fig. 17

WINDSCREEN/
REARSCREEN WIPERSWARNING
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 253

Changing the windscreen wiper
blade (fig. 18)

Instructions to fit the blade

SPRAY JETS (fig. 20-21)

Proceed as follows:

Instructions to remove the blade– fit the tab (C) in the hole on the blade
central part (B);

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking levels” in this chapter.

Proceed as follows:– raise the windscreen wiper arm (A);– turn the blade (B) by 90° around thetab (C) fitted on the arm final part;– remove the blade from the tab (C).

– refit the arm with the blade on the windscreen.
Changing the rearscreen blade(fig. 19)

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.
If necessary, direct the jet of fluid working on the adjustment screw (A).

– Raise the cover (A) and remove the armfrom the car, slackening the nut (B) that
fastens it to the pivot pin.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

A0A1088m– Correctly position the new arm and firmly tighten the nut.
– Lower the cover.

fig. 20
A0A0728m

A0A0227m

A0A1089m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 18

fig. 19

fig. 21253

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Pagina 254

HEADLIGHT WASHERS
Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean (fig. 22).
If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

BODYWORKPROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are:– atmospheric pollution– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other cars.
On your Alfa 147, Alfa Romeo has
implemented the best manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the bodywork
against corrosion.

A0A1013m

Alfawiki.nl

254 fig. 22

These include:– Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.
– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed points:
underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, etc.
– Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.
CAR EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTYThe Alfa 147 is guaranteed against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty booklet.

4-07-2008

12:05

ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORKPaint
The paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal. In the case of deep scrapes
or scores, you are advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately
to avoid the formation of rust. Only original
products should be used for touching up paint(see “Body paint identification plate” in the“Technical Specifications” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.

Pagina 255

To correctly wash the car:1) Spray the car with a low pressure jet ofwater.
2) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.
3) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or chamois leather.
f the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, follow these recommendations:– remove the antenna from the roof to
avoid damages;– water with a cleansing solution must be
used for washing;– rinse accurately to avoid cleansing solution residues which may remain on the
body or hidden parts.
Some automatic systems
provided with old generation and/or not correctly
maintained brushes may damage thevarnish, easing the creation of micro-scratches, especially on darkcolours. To remove those scratches,slightly polish with a specific product.

When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet and around the headlights where water may stagnate. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left in
the open so that residual water can evaporate.
Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GBExterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the car.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release
give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.

Alfawiki.nl

255

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:05

Windows
Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.
IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.
Engine compartment
At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.
Detergents pollute water.
The car should therefore be
washed in areas equipped
for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.
IMPORTANT The car should be washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing, make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged or
removed.

256

Pagina 256

INTERIOR FITTINGS
Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause
oxidisation on the sheet metal.

WARNING
Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside the car. The electrostatic
charges generated when rubbing toclean may cause fire.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS– Use a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.
– Rub the seat with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral detergent.

Alfawiki.nl

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.
– Remove liquid and grease stains witha dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcoholbased products, even at low concentrations.

4-07-2008

12:05

The car upholstery can resist wear resulting fromthe normal use of the car.
However, it is necessary to avoid
excessive and/or prolonged friction with clothing accessories suchas metal buckles, studs, velcro andsimilar material, as this friction,acting locally and with a high pressure over the knitted fabric, maycause some threads to break andthus damage the seat cover/lining.

Pagina 257

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
Use appropriate products designed to preserve the appearance of components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument cluster.

WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car. They might explode. Aerosol cans must never be
exposed to a temperature above
50°C. The temperature inside thecar exposed to the sun may go wellbeyond that figure.

STEERING WHEEL/GEARBOX
LEVER KNOB COVERED WITH
TRUE LEATHER
These components must be cleaned onlywith water and neutral soap. Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.
Before using specific products for cleaning interior fittings, read the instructions on
the label carefully to make sure that the
product does not contain spirit and/or alcohol-based substances.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

234-257_Alfa147 Q2 GB

If, when cleaning the windscreen with specific products for glass, some drops fall on
the leather of the steering wheel/gerabox
lever knob, it is necessary to remove them
immediately and then to wash the involved
area with water and neutral soap.
IMPORTANT It is advisable, in the eventof steering wheel locking device, to operatewith great care to avoid damaging the covering leather.

Alfawiki.nl

257

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 258

T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N SIDENTIFICATION DATA
You are advised to note the identification
codes. The identification datastamped andgiven on the labels and their position are
the following (fig. 1):
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
4 - Engine label.

IDENTIFICATION LABELThis (fig. 2) is to be found on the front
crossmember of the engine compartment.
It contains the following information:(A) Space for details of national homologation(B) Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number(C) Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national regulations(D) Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified

A0A1090m(E) Space for smoke coefficient (JTDM
versions)(F) Space for punching manufacturer’s
name.
BODYWORK LABELThis is located in the engine bay, to one
side of the upper right shock absorber(fig. 3) and contains:– Type of vehicle: ZAR 937000– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).

A0A0246m

A0A0247m

Alfawiki.nl

258 fig. 1

fig. 2

fig. 3

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 259

ENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONSBODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABELThe label (fig. 4) is on the inner left edgeof the tailgate. It contains the following information:
A. Paint manufacturer.
B. Name of colour.
C. Colour code.

Code type5 doors

1.6 T.SPARK (105HP)

AR37203

937AXA1A 00G
937AXA1A 00H (*)

937BXA1A 05G
937BXA1A 05H (*)

1.6 T.SPARK (120HP)

AR32104
AR32103 (*)

937AXB1A 01G
937AXB1A 01H (*)

937BXB1A 06G
937BXB1A 06H (*)

2.0 T.SPARK

AR32310937AXC1A 03G
937AXC1A 03E (*)

937BXC1A 09G
937BXC1A 09H (*)

2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

AR32310937AXC11 02G
937AXC11 02H (*)

937BXC11 07G
937BXC11 07H (*)

JTDM (120HP)

937A3000

937AXU1A 32B

937BXU1A 33B

JTDM (115HP)

939A7000 (*)

937AXV1A 34 (*)

937BXV1A 35 (*)

JTDM (150HP)

937A5000

937AXN1B 30C

937BXN1B 31C

JTDM (136HP)

192B1000 (*)

937AXS1B 27C (*)

937BXS1B 28C (*)

ENGINE STAMP
Theengine marking is stamped on the gearbox side of the crankcase, in correspondencewith the exhaust manifold.

Body version
3 doors

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB(*) For specific markets
A0A0248m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4

259

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 260

ENGINE

1.6 T.SPARK(105HP)

1.6 T.SPARK(120HP)

2.0 T.SPARK

JTDM(120HP)

JTDM(115HP) (**)

JTDM
(150HP)

JTDM(136HP) (**)

AR37203

AR32104

AR32310

937A3000

939A7000

937A5000

192B1000

Cycle

Otto

Otto

Otto

DieselDieselDieselDieselNumber and position of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

Code type

Piston bore and strokemm

82 x 75.65

82 x 75.65

83 x 91

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

Total displacement

cm

1598

1598

1970

1910

1910

1910

1910

10.3

10.3

10.0

18

18

17.5

17.5

kW
HP
rpm

77
105
5600

88
120
6200

110
150
6300

88
120
4000

85
115
4000

110
150
4000

100
136
4000

Nm
kgm
rpm

140
14.3
4200

146
14.9
4200

181
18.5
3800

280
28.5
2000

280
28.5
2000

305
31
2000

305
31
2000

NGK
BKUR6ETB(central)NGK CR7EKC(side)NGKBKR6EKPA(central)
NGK PMR7A(Side)NGKBKR6EKPA(central)
NGK PMR7A(side)––––

Unleaded premium petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

Unleaded premium petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

Diesel fuelUnleaded pre- Diesel fuelfor motor
for motor
mium petrol
vehiclesvehicles95 RON(Specification (Specification (Specification
EN590)
EN590)
EN228)

Diesel fuelfor motor
vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuelfor motor
vehicles(Specification
EN590)

3

Compression ratio
Maximum horsepower (EEC):at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs (*)Fuel(*) There are two different spark plugs for each cylinder, one per type(**) Version for specific markets

To change plugs contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

260

The use of Eurodiesel fuel is recommended only for markets/versions where required. In case it is not available, use fuel conforming to EN590 European Specification.

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 261

FUEL SUPPLY
Supply1.6 T.SPARK (105HP)

1.6 T.SPARK (120HP)

2.0 T.SPARKJTDMMulti Point electric injection

Multi Point electric injection

Multi Point electric injection

Multijet direct injection
with supercharging

WARNING

Alterations or repairs to the fuel supply system carried out incorrectly andwithout taking account of the technical features of the system, may cause operating faults with the risk of fire.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

TRANSMISSION
1.6 T.SPARK (105HP-120HP)
2.0 T.SPARK

2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

JTDM (120HP)

JTDM(136HP-150HP)

GearboxFive forward gears plus reverse
with synchronisers for forward
speedsFive forward gears plus reverse
with electronic control

Six forward gears plus reverse allsynchronised

Five forward gears plus reverse allsynchronised

ClutchDry single disk with hydrauliccontrol

Dry single disk withelectrohydraulic control

Dry single disk with hydraulicDry single disk with hydrauliccontrol

Drive

Front

Front

Front

Front

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE WITH SELF-LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
Alfa Q2 characteristics are such as to guarantee top performance with whatever road condition. Alfa Q2 features front wheel drive with front mechanicalself-locking differential LSD (Limited Slip Differential). Torque level between right and left wheel is modulated according to the TORSEN B front differential
grip. Mechanical modulation is continuous and gradual thus optimizing drive under whatever running condition and guaranteeing smooth drive, high stability
and keeping top comfort conditions. This type of differential enables toAlfawiki.nl
exploit the tyre-road grip at the best even under poor grip conditions: the driver is however charged with observing common safety rules since road safety is always the driver's responsibility.

261

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 262

BRAKES
1.6 T.SPARK (105HP-120HP) - 2.0 T.SPARK - JTDM
Service brakes:– front

Disk– rearDisk

Parking brakeControlled by hand lever, acting on the rear brakes

SUSPENSION
1.6 T.SPARK (105HP-120HP) - 2.0 T.SPARK - JTDM
Front

quadrilateral system with stabiliser bar

Rear

Mc Pherson type

STEERING SYSTEM
1.6 T.SPARK (105HP-120HP) - 2.0 T.SPARK - JTDM
rack and pinion with hydraulic power steeringType
Turning radius(between pavements)

262

m

Alfawiki.nl

11.5

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 263

WHEELS
1.6 T.SPARK DISTINCTIVE
1.6 T.SPARK IMPRESSION - PROGRESSION(105HP - 120HP) (105HP - 120HP) - JTDM IMPRESSION JTDM DISTINCTIVE
PROGRESSION (120 HP) - JTDM PROGRESSION

2.0 T.SPARK 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed JTDM DISTINCTIVE

For versions/markets
where applicableStandard fittings
Rims

6J x 15” (steel)

6.5J x 15” (alloy)

6.5J x 16” (alloy)

7J x 17” (alloy)

Tyres

185/65 R15” 88H

195/60 R15” 88V

205/55 R16” 91V (6)205/55 R16” 91W (6)215/45 R17” 87W (•)– rim

4J x 15”

4J x 15”

4J x 15”

4J x 15”– tyre125/80 R15” 95M

125/80 R15” 95M

125/80 R15” 95M

125/80 R15” 95M

6.5J x 15” (alloy)
6.5J x 16” (alloy)
7J x 17” (alloy)

6.5J x 16” (alloy)
7J x 17” (alloy)

6.5J x 15” (alloy)
7J x 17” (alloy)

7J x 18” (alloy)

Tyres

195/60 R15” 88V
205/55 R16” 91V (•)
215/45 R17” 87W (•)

205/55 R16” 91V (•)
215/45 R17” 87W (•)

195/60 R15” 88V
215/45 R17” 87W (•)

215/40 ZR18” 89W (•)
Reinforced

Winter tyres

185/65 R15” 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16” 91T (M+S)

195/60 R15” 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16” 91T (M+S)

205/55 R16” 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17” 87H (M+S)

215/45 R17” 87H (M+S)

Compact
spare wheel:

Optional items
Rims

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB(•) Unchainable tyres - (6) Alternative tyres. Unchainable tyres

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD (bar)Tyres
185/65 R15”
front
rear

Tyres
195/60 R15”
front
rear

Tyres
205/55 R16”
front
rear

Tyres
215/45 R17”
front
rear

Tyres
215/40 ZR18”
Reinforced
front
rear

reduced load

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.3

2.3

2.4

2.3

2.4

2.4

full loadr

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.6

2.6

2.7

2.6

2.7

2.7

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified ratingWith winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared Alfawiki.nl
with the specified rating
Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.

Compact sparewheel
125/80 R15”
4.2

263

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 264

RIMS AND TYRES

CORRECT TYRE READING (fig. 5)

Load index (capacity)

Pressed steel or alloy rims.

Below, please find the instructions needed to understand the meaning of the code
stamped on the tyre.

60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg

Radial tubeless tyres.
The log book shows all the homologatedtyres.
IMPORTANT In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and the
car Log Book, only the latter should be considered.
While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the car must be fitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.

A0A0718m

The code may be in one of the ways given in the example.

Example:205/55 R 16 91 W
or
205/55 ZR 16
205 = Nominal width (S, distance in mm
between sides).
55 = Percentage height/width (H/S)
ratio.
R= Radial tyre.
ZR = Radial tyre, with speed over 240
km/h.
16 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
91 = Load index (capacity), e.g. 91 =615 kg. Not present in ZR tyres.
W, Z = Maximum speed index. In ZR tyres
the speed index Z is before the R.

Alfawiki.nl

264 fig. 584 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg

4-07-2008

Maximum speed index
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R= up to 170 km/h

S

= up to 180 km/h.

T= up to 190 km/h.

12:06

Pagina 265

Maximum speed index
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.
T M + S = up to 190 km/h.

COMPACT SPARE WHEEL

H = up to 210 km/h.

Pressed steel rim.

V = over 210 km/h.

Tubeless tyre.

ZR = over 240 km/h.

For specific markets normally-sized spare
wheel.

Y

Below, please find the instructions needed to understand the meaning of the code
stamped on the rim, as shown in (fig. 5).

H M + S = up to 210 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

CORRECT RIM READING= up to 300 km/h.

Example:6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 43

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

6.5 = rim width in inches (1)J= rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests)(2)16 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = ø)
H2 = “hump” shape and number (relief
on the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim).
ET 43 = camber angle (distance between
disk/rim line and wheel rim centre line)

Alfawiki.nl

265

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 266

WHEEL GEOMETRY
All versions

Front wheels:

Rear wheels:– camber–0° 48’ ± 20’– caster+ 3° 55’ ± 30’– toe-in– 1 ± 0.6 mm (*)(– 9 ± 5’)– camber– 44’ ± 20’– toe-in+ 3 ± 1 mm(+ 27’ ± 9’)(*) The toe-in values, conversion from ‘ to mm, is calculated considering a 15” rim, regardless of the rims actually used; if it is not possible to fit a 15” rimon the check stand, make reference to the value in. Also remember that the tow-in value including tolerance must be equally subdivided between the twowheels.

PERFORMANCE

Kilometer with standing start

km/h

Accelerationfrom 0-100 km/h
sec.

1.6 T.SPARK (105HP)

185

11.3

33

1.6 T.SPARK (120HP)

195

10.6

31.8

2.0 T.SPARK

208

9.3

30.2

2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

208

9.3

30.2

JTDM (120HP)

193

9.6

32.2

208

8.8

30.0

Maximum speed

JTDM (150HP)

Alfawiki.nl

266

sec.

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 267

A0A1091m

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSDIMENSIONS
LThe sizes arein mm andrefer to the car fitted withstandard tyres.
Slight changes with
optional tyres.
Height with
unladen car.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME
Capacity ................................... 292 dm3
Capacity with rear seatback rest folded ........................ 1042 dm3

fig. 6

3-door versions

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

1.6 T.SPARK IMPRESSION PROGRESSION(105HP - 120HP) - JTDM
IMPRESSION - PROGRESSION(120HP) JTDM PROGRESSION

4223

946

2546

731

1442 (●)

1518 (●)

1892

1729

1502 (●)

1.6 T.SPARK DISTINCTIVE(105HP - 120HP) JTDM DISTINCTIVE JTDM DISTINCTIVE

4223

946

2546

731

1442 (■)

1509 (■)

1892

1729

1494 (■)

2.0 T.SPARK 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

4223

946

2546

1421 (▲)

1509 (▲)

1892

1729

1494 (▲)(●) With 185/65 R15” tyres(■) With 195/60 R15” tyres

731
Alfawiki.nl(▲) With 205/55 R16” tyres267258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 268

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A0A1092m

The sizes arein mm andrefer to the car fitted withstandard tyres.
Slight changes with
optional tyres.
Height with
unladen car.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME
Capacity ................................... 292 dm3
Capacity with rear seatback rest folded ........................ 1042 dm3

268

fig. 7

5-door versions

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

1.6 T.SPARK IMPRESSION PROGRESSION(105HP - 120HP) - JTDM
IMPRESSION - PROGRESSION(120HP) JTDM PROGRESSION

4223

946

2546

731

1442 (●)

1518 (●)

1892

1729

1502 (●)

1.6 T.SPARK DISTINCTIVE(105HP - 120HP) JTDM DISTINCTIVE JTDM DISTINCTIVE

4223

946

2546

731

1442 (■)

1509 (■)

1892

1729

1494 (■)

2.0 T.SPARK 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

4223

946

2546 Alfawiki.nl
731

1421 (▲)

1509 (▲)

1892

1729

1494 (▲)(●) With 185/65 R15” tyres(■) With 195/60 R15” tyres(▲) With 205/55 R16” tyres

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 269

WEIGHTS
2.0 T.SPARK
1.6 T.SPARK
1.6 T.SPARK(105HP)(120HP)
3 doors 5 doors 3 doors 5 doors 3 doors 5 doors

2.0 T.SPARK
Selespeed
3 doors 5 doors

JTDM(120HP)
3 doors 5 doors

JTDM(136HP-150HP)
3 doors 5 doors

Kerb weight(with fuel oil and fluids,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories)

kg

1190

1210

1200

1220

1250

1270

1250

1270

1270

1290

1290

1310

Payload (*) including
driver

kg

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

Max permissible
weights(**):– front axle

kg

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

990

990

– rear axle

kg

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

980

– total

kg

1710

1730

1720

1740

1770

1790

1770

1790

1790

1810

1810

1830

kg

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300

kg

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

Maximum load on roof

kg

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

Maximum load on ball(braked trailer)

kg

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Towable weights:– braked trailer– trailer without brake(*) With special equipment (sunroof, trailer towing device, etc.) the loadless weight increases, thereby reducing the payload, with regard to the maximum
permissible loads.
IMPORTANT If only the luggage compartment is used for storing the goods, the maximum load in the compartment must not exceed 350 kg in the loadcondition with just one person onboard.
(**)Loads not to be exceeded. It is the driver’s responsibility to place Alfawiki.nl
goods in the boot and/or on the loading surface in accordance with the maximum permissible loads.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

269

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 270

REFILLING

Fuel tank:litres– including a reserve of litres

1.6 T.SPARK(105HP)

1.6 T.SPARK(120HP)

2.0 T.SPARK

2.0 T.SPARK
Selespeed

JTDM(120HP)

JTDM(136HP 150HP)

Specified fuels
and original lubricants

60 ●
7●

60 ●
7●

60 ●
7●

60 ●
7●

60 ❍
7❍

60 ❍
7❍

● Unleaded Premium petrol withno less than 95 R.O.N(Specification EN228)❍ Diesel fuel for motor vehicles(Specification EN228)

Engine coolingsystemOil sump and filter

Mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU UP at 50% (▲)

litreslitres

6.8

7

7.2

7,2

7.2

7.2

4.4 ■

4.4 ■

4.4 ❍

4.4 ❍

4.4 ❑

4.5 ❑

■ SELENIA 20K for Alfa Romeo❍ SELENIA RACING❑ SELENIA WR

Mechanical transmission/differential
litres

2.01

2.01

2.01

2.01

2.01

2.1

TUTELA CARTECHNYX

Selespeed transmission

–

–

–

0.6

–

–

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Hydraulic power steering

litres

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS

litres

0.52

0.52

0.52

0.5

0.52

0.52

TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa RomeoWindscreen and rearscreen
washer reservoir:
litres– with headlamp washer litres

3.2
6.4

3.2
6.4

3.2
6.4

3.2
6.4

3.2
6.4

3.2
6.4

Mixture of water and fluid
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35(▲) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.

270

Alfawiki.nl
The use of Eurodiesel fuel is recommended only
for markets/versions where required. In case it is not available, use fuel conforming to EN590 European Specification.

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 271

LUBRICANT AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONSUSABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
UseLubricants for
petrol engines
2.0 T.SPARK,
2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct car operation

Synthetic-based engine oil, grade SAE 10W-60.
FIAT 9.55535-H3 qualification

Recommended fluids
and lubricants original

Applications

SELENIA RACINGTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

As per Service Schedule
Lubricants for
petrol engines
1.6 T.SPARK

Synthetic-based engine oils, grade SAE 10W-40
that pass ACEA A3 and API SL specifications.
FIAT 9.55535-G2 qualification

SELENIA 20K
for Alfa Romeo

Lubricants fordiesel engines

Synthetic-based engine oils, grade SAE 5W-40
that pass ACEA B3 and API CF specifications
FIAT 9.55535-N2 qualification

SELENIA WR
As per Service Schedule

For regular operation of Multijet versions fitted with DPF, use the genuine lubricant only. In the event of an emergency, lacking the genuine lubricant, top up just once with max.
0.5 l and go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
In case not original SAE 5W-40 products are used, with the same viscosity degree with minimum performance ACEA C3 for gasoline engines and ACEA B4 for Diesel engines are
accepted; in this case, the best engine performance is not ensured.
Using low-quality products, not compliant with ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 properties and specifications could cause engine damages not covered by warranty.
For very cold temperatures, consult Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for the proper Selenia product to use.

Alfawiki.nl

271

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

Use

12:06

Pagina 272

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct car operation

Recommended fluids
and lubricants

Synthetic-based lubricant, SAE 75W-85 grade.
Pass API GL-4 PLUS, FIAT 9.55550 specifications

TUTELA CARTECHNYX

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

Specific fluid for gear selector electrohydraulic actuators

TUTELA CAR
CS SPEED

Selespeed transmission
electrically-operated
electrochydraulicdrive

Automatic transmission lubricant Exceeding the"ATF DEXRON II D LEV" specification.

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic power steering

Synthetic oil F.M.V.S.S. n. 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925,
SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01

TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo

Hydraulic brakes
and clutches

PARAFLU UP (*)

Protective agent for radiators

Protective with antifreeze action (red colour) based on inhibitedmonoethylene glycol with organic formulation based on O.A.T. technologythat meets CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications

Radiator antifreeze
proportion: 50% distilledwater and 50%
PARAFLU UP (❑)

Additive for diesel fuelAdditive for fuel oil with protective action for Diesel engines

TUTELA DIESEL ART

To be mixed with the fueloil (25 cc per 10 litres)

Windscreen/rearscreen/
headlamp washer fluid

Mixture of spirits and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II

TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC35

To be used neator diluted

Lubricants and greases
for transmissions

Brake fluid(*) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having characteristics different from those specified.
(❑) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU
UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
Alfawiki.nl

272

Applications

4-07-2008

12:06

FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basis of
the homologation tests set down by specific
European directives.
The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:– urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of the car;– extraurban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extraurban useof the car; the speed varies between 0 and
120 km/h;

Pagina 273

CO2 EMISSIONSIMPORTANT The type of route,traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the car, trim level/equipment/accessories, load, presenceof a roof rack, use of the climate
control system, other situations
that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels thanthose measured (see “Reducing
running costs and environment pollution” in the chapter “Correct useof the car”).

The CO2 emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed
cycle.
CO2 emissions according to directive
2004/3/CE (g/km)– combined consumption: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban cycle
consumtpion and about 63% of extraurban
consumption.

1.6 T.SPARK(105HP)

192 - 196 (*)

1.6 T.SPARK(120HP)

194 - 197 (*)

2.0 T.SPARK

211 - 211 (*)

2.0 T.SPARK
Selespeed

211 - 211 (*)

JTDM (120HP)

153/145 (**)

JTDM (150HP)

157/151 (**)(*) EURO4 versions (for specific markets)(**) For versions/markets where applicable

1.6 T.SPARK(105HP)

1.6 T.SPARK(105HP) (*)

1.6 T.SPARK(120HP)

2.0
T.SPARK

2.0 T.SPARK
Selespeed

JTDM(120HP)

JTDM(150HP)

Urban

11.1

11.3

11.2

12.1

12.1

7.4

7.8

Extraurban

6.3

6.4

6.4

7.0

7.0

4.4

4.5

Combined

8.1

8.2
8.2
Alfawiki.nl

8.9

8.9

5.5

5.7

Fuel consumption according to
Directive 2004/3/CE(litres x 100 km)(*) EURO 4 versions (for specific markets)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

273

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 274

INSTRUMENT
PANEL
Digital multifunction display
versions
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position E. Clock/outside temperature display F. Rev counter
NOTE JTDM versions are fitted with warning
lights m and c and the rev counter end
scale value is at 6000 rpm.

A0A1122m

fig. 1 - Petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position E. Clock/outside temperature display F. Rev counter
NOTE JTDM versions are fitted with warning lights m and c and the rev counterend scale value is at 6000 rpm.

274

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2 - Black Line and Q2 versions

A0A1131m

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 275

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

Reconfigurable multifunction
display versions
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position E. Reconfigurable multifunction display F. Rev counter
NOTE JTDM versions are fitted with warning
lights m and c and the rev counter end
scale value is at 6000 rpm.

A0A1123m

fig. 3 - Petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position E. Reconfigurable multifunction display F. Rev counter
NOTE JTDM versions are fitted with warning
lights m and c and the rev counter end
scale value is at 6000 rpm.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4 - Black Line and Q2 versions

A0A1132m

275

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 276

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position
E. Reconfigurable multifunction display F. Rev counter

A0A1124m

fig. 5 - 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display mileage
recorder, trip meter with headlamp position
E. Reconfigurable multifunction display F. Rev counter

Alfawiki.nl

276

fig. 6 - 2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed Black Line and Q2

A0A1133m

258-277_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:06

Pagina 277

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSDASHBOARD

A0A1104m

fig. 7
1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Passenger's air bag - 4. Tailgate release button - 5. Card holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 6. Sound system (for versions/markets where applicable) - 7. Centre swivel air vents - 8. Fixed upper
vent - 9. Glass holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 10. Front fog light button - 11. Hazard light switch - 12. Rear fog light button - 13. Outside light control lever - 14. Speedometer with display for mileage recorder, trip meter and headlamp aiming device - 15. Fuellevel gauge with reserve warning light - 16. Multifunction display - 17. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 18. Rev. counter - 19. Windscreen wiper control lever - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 22. Ignition key and switch - 23. Horn - 24. Steering wheel locking/release
lever - 25. Driver's air bag - 26. Door locking button - 27. Controls
Alfawiki.nl
for heating, ventilation and climate control - 28. Cigar lighter/ashtray housing door - 29. Temperature sensor - 30. Glove box.

277

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ABS ......................................... 140

Car inactivity.............................. 193

Accessories purchased by the user... 173

Card holder recess ........................ 128

Additional heater.......................... 110

Cell phones provision .................... 173

Additional stop light (third stop) ..... 217

Changing a wheel ........................ 201

Air bags (front and side) ...............

38

Changing bulbs ............................ 209

Air cleaner................................... 246

Checking levels ............................ 239

Alfa Romeo CODE.........................

6

Armrest (front/rear) ................... 19-23
Ashtray.................................. 126-127
ASR (system).............................. 144

Children (carrying safely) ..............

34

Children’s safety device.................

17

Cigar lighter ................................ 126

At the filling station ...................... 182

Climate control(automatic two-zone) ...............

Battery ..................................... 247

Climate control (manual)................ 88

95

Climate control system..................

86

Bonnet ....................................... 135

Clock..........................................

59

Boot ......................................... 131

CO2 emissions ............................. 273

Boot light

CODE card...................................

Bluetooth (hands-free kit) ............. 174

278

Pagina 278

7

Dashboard................................. 52
Diesel fuel filter............................ 246
Digital multifunction display ........... 58
Dimensions ................................. 267
Direction indicators- changing front bulbs................. 214- changing rear bulbs.................. 216- changing side bulbs.................. 215- switching on ........................... 45
Display (reconfigurable
multifunction) ........................... 62
Door lights .................................. 126- changing bulbs ........................ 218
Door locking system ..................... 111
Doors .........................................
7
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) ........ 185
Electronic alarm system ...............

11- changing bulbs ........................ 220

Comfort suspensions..................... 191

Electronic control units .................. 250

Brakes........................................ 262

Controls...................................... 110

Emergency starting....................... 197

Braking lights

Correct use of the car............ 186- starting with an auxiliary battery 198- changing bulbs ........................ 216

Courtesy light .............................. 125

Engine........................................ 260

Bulbs ......................................... 209

Cruise controlAlfawiki.nl..............................

49

Engine compartment .................... 135

4-07-2008

12:07

Pagina 279

Engine oil (consumption) .............. 241
Engine starting ............................ 186
EOBD ......................................... 146
External lights (switching on) ........ 44

Handbrake lever......................... 112

First-aid kit................................. 233

Headlamp beam adjustment .......... 112

Fix&Go automatic ........................ 204
Fluids and lubricants ..................... 271
Follow me home device ................ 46
Foglights- changing bulbs ........................ 215- switching on ........................... 110
Front ceiling light ......................... 124- changing bulbs ........................ 218
Front seats.................................. 18
Fuel (consumption) ...................... 273
Fuel economy.............................. 189
Fuel flap ..................................... 183
Fuel supply ................................. 261
Fuses ......................................... 221

Headlight washers................... 47-254

Getting to know your car....

Hands-free kit (Bluetooth)............. 174
Hazard warning lights- switching on ........................... 110

Headlights- adjustment abroad................... 138- compensation for tilt ................ 137
Headrests ...................................

20

Heater........................................

88

Hoses......................................... 252

Ignition device ............................

14

In an emergency..................... 197
In the event of an accident ............ 232
Inertial fuel cut off switch .............. 111
Installation of electric/
electronic devices ..................... 174

6

Instrument cluster ........................

53

Glass stand/Card holder................ 128

Intelligent washing(windscreen) ............................

47

Glove compartment ...................... 123
Glove compartment light- changing bulbs ........................ 220

Keys.........................................

6

Levers at steering wheel ..............

44
Lights (switching on) .................... 44
Low beam headlights- changing bulbs ........................ 213- switching on ........................... 44
Luggage compartment .................. 131
Luggage restrainer net .................. 24

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

Main beam headlights- changing bulbs ........................ 214- switching on ........................... 44
Maintenance- additional operations................ 237- annual inspection programme.... 237- scheduled maintenance ............ 234- scheduled maintenanceprogramme............................. 235
Mechanical gearbox...................... 113
Mileage recorder .......................... 56

Number plate lights

Interior (cleaning) ........................ 256

Alfawiki.nl
Interior fittings.............................
123- changing bulbs ........................ 217

Oddment recesses................. 127-128

279

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

Paintwork (maintenance) ............ 255

Rearview mirrors..........................

25

Sun visors ................................... 129

Parking....................................... 189

Refilling ...................................... 270

Suspensions ................................ 262

Parking sensors............................ 139

Remote control ............................

7

Symbols ..................................... 5-6

Performance................................ 266

Rev counter.................................

56

Pollen filter...................... 94-109-247

Reversing light

Power windows ...........................

26

Radio transmitters andRain sensor .................................

- changing bulbs ........................ 216
Right hand drive versions..... 274

cellular telephones..................... 174
47

Roof rack (provision).................... 136

Safeguarding the environment ...... 184

Technical specifications......... 258
Towing the car ............................. 230
Towing trailers ............................. 193
Transmission................................ 261

VDC system .............................. 142
Vehicle maintenance .............. 234

Raising the car............................. 231

Seat belts ...................................

Rear ceiling light .......................... 125

Selespeed gearbox ....................... 114

Warning lights and messages......

Sidelights

Weights ...................................... 269- changing bulbs ........................ 219
Rear fog guards

28

73- changing front bulbs................. 213

Wheel geometry .......................... 266- changing bulbs ........................ 216- changing rear bulbs.................. 216

Wheels and tyres ......................... 251- switching on ........................... 111- switching on ...........................

Windscreen washer

44

Rear oddment pockets .................. 129

Snow chains................................ 192- intelligent washing function.......

47

Rear seats...................................

21

Sound system presetting ............... 147- operation................................

46

Rearscreen washer .......................

48

Sound system.............................. 148- spray jets ............................... 253- spray jet................................. 253

Spark plugs................................. 260

Rearscreen wiper

280

Pagina 280

Steering lock ...............................

15

Windscreen wiper- blade replacement ................... 252- blade replacement ................... 253

Steering system ........................... 262- operation................................

- operation................................

Alfawiki.nl
Sunroof ......................................
130- spray jets ............................... 253

48

46

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

Pagina 281

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Alfa Romeo has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the end of its life
span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses dueto the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of theEuropean Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002 on,while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our customers byde-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised
treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Alfa Romeo web site or call the toll freenumber 00800 2532 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

Alfawiki.nl

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

Pagina 282

Alfawiki.nl

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

Pagina 283

Alfawiki.nl

278-284_Alfa147 Q2 GB

4-07-2008

12:07

Pagina 284

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES
Tyres
205/55 R16” (•)
front
rear

Tyres
215/40 ZR18” (•)
Tyres
Reinforced
215/45 R17” (•)
front
rear
front
rear

Tyres
185/65 R15”
front
rear

Tyres
195/60 R15”
front
rear

reduced load

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.2

2.3

2.3

2.4

2.3

2.4

2.4

full loadr

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.6

2.6

2.7

2.6

2.7

2.7

Compact spare wheel
125/80 R15”

4.2(•) Unchainable tyres
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar higher than the rating specified for standard tyres.
Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENTREFUELLING

Oil sump and filter ......................

Fuel tank capacity............................................................ litres 60
Reserve ............................................................................ litres 7

litres 4.4 (4.5 for JTDM versions)

Do not discard used oil in the environment.

For cars with petrol engine, only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.
(Specification EN228).
For cars with diesel engine, only use Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590).

CUSTOMER SERVICESTECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Pubblication no. 60431857 - 1st Edition - 06/2008

Alfawiki.nl

All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part, is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.

SERVICEAlfawiki.nl